Methods and apparatus for communicating transmission backlog information

ABSTRACT

Methods and apparatus for communicating transmission backlog information are described. Reporting control factors are utilized to expand reporting possibilities for a fixed bit size request report. At least one report control factor is determined as a function of channel quality information, power information, device capability information, and/or quality of service information. A transmission backlog report value is interpreted as a function of a reporting control factor. A wide range of quantization schemes for reporting transmission backlog information are facilitated corresponding to a small bit size report. A communications device can adaptively select a quantization request level closely matched to its current needs such as to provide an accurate representation of its current traffic channel resource needs. A communications device may request a number of frames in a request report and the same report may be indirectly requesting a number of communications segments needed to clear its transmission backlog.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

The present application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 60/752,973, filed on Dec. 22, 2005, titled “COMMUNICATIONS METHODS AND APPARATUS”, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/333,792, filed on Jan. 17, 2006, titled “METHODS AND APPARATUS OF IMPLEMENTING AND/OR USING A DEDICATED CONTROL CHANNEL”, each of which is hereby expressly incorporated by reference.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to wireless communications methods and apparatus and, more particularly, to methods and apparatus related to communicating transmission backlog information.

BACKGROUND

Wireless terminals that support transmission of uplink traffic, e.g., user data, from the wireless terminal to a base station normally use uplink air link resources to both communicate control information and user data. In multiple access wireless communications systems, typically, multiple wireless terminals using a common base station attachment point are competing for valuable uplink air link resources, e.g., uplink traffic channel air link resources. One approach to partitioning uplink traffic channel resources is for the wireless terminals to send resource requests to their current base station attachment point, and for the base station to consider the competing requests. The base station may then allocate resources, e.g., uplink traffic channel segments, in accordance with various scheduling rules.

Individual wireless terminals may have different needs for uplink traffic channel resources at different times, e.g., depending on a variety of factors such as the type(s) of user data to be communicated, latency requirements, predetermined data groupings, and/or priority levels. Different types of user data with different transmission requirements may be, for example, voice data, image data, Web browser information, data files, etc.

Different resource needs may also be due to the fact that an individual wireless terminal may experience different channel quality conditions and/or have different amounts of power available for transmission at different points in time. Factors such as channel quality and power availability can influence acceptable data transmission rates.

A single fixed interpretation uplink traffic channel request report format used for a particular type of uplink request report, understood by the base station and the wireless terminals, and used uniformly in the system, although simple to implement, is not well suited to efficiently communicate a wide range of uplink traffic channel request information.

Based on the above discussion, it should be appreciated that there is a need for methods and apparatus for reporting information in an efficient manner. It would be desirable if at least some efficient reporting methods could be devised. It would also be desirable if at least some methods could be used to implement an uplink traffic channel resource request structure which is accommodating to a wide range of wireless terminal operating conditions, types of wireless terminals and/or blend of applications. It should also be appreciated that for some systems there is a need for at least some methods and apparatus which can efficiently communicate the varying needs of individual wireless terminals for uplink traffic channel resources. Methods and apparatus which achieve reporting diversity while accommodating small information report size would be beneficial. It would be beneficial if at least some methods and apparatus facilitate a wide range of quantization schemes such that a particular quantization scheme well suited to a wireless terminal at a particular time can be selected and used by the wireless terminal to communicate backlog information. It would also be beneficial if at least some of the methods and apparatus for efficient reporting were to make use of available information already being communicated between the wireless terminal and base station such as quality information, thus expanding reporting options while retaining a small report bit size.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIG. 1 is a drawing of an exemplary communication system implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 2 illustrates an exemplary base station, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 3 illustrates an exemplary wireless terminal, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 4 is a drawing of exemplary uplink dedicated control channel (DCCH) segments in an exemplary uplink timing and frequency structure in an exemplary orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) multiple access wireless communications system.

FIG. 5 includes a drawing of an exemplary dedicated control channel in an exemplary uplink timing and frequency structure in an exemplary orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) multiple access wireless communications system at a time when each set of DCCH segments corresponding to a logical DCCH channel tone is in the full-tone format.

FIG. 6 includes a drawing of an exemplary dedicated control channel in an exemplary uplink timing and frequency structure in an exemplary orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) multiple access wireless communications system at a time when each set of DCCH segments corresponding to a logical DCCH channel tone is in the split-tone format.

FIG. 7 includes a drawing of an exemplary dedicated control channel in an exemplary uplink timing and frequency structure in an exemplary orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) multiple access wireless communications system at a time when some of the sets of DCCH segments corresponding to a logical DCCH channel tone are in the full-tone format and some of the sets of DCCH segments corresponding to a logical DCCH channel tone are in the split-tone format.

FIG. 8 is a drawing illustrating the use of format and mode in an exemplary uplink DCCH in accordance with various embodiments, the mode defining the interpretation of the information bits in the DCCH segments.

FIG. 9 illustrates several examples corresponding to FIG. 8 illustrating different modes of operation.

FIG. 10 is a drawing illustrating an exemplary default mode of the full tone format in a beaconslot for a given DCCH tone.

FIG. 11 illustrates an exemplary definition of the default mode in the full-tone format of the uplink DCCH segments in the first uplink superslot after the WT migrates to the ON state.

FIG. 12 is an exemplary summary list of dedicated control reports (DCRs) in the full-tone format for the default mode.

FIG. 13 is a table of an exemplary format for an exemplary 5 bit downlink SNR report (DLSNR5) in non-DL macrodiversity mode.

FIG. 14 is a table of an exemplary format of 5 bit downlink SNR report (DLSNR5) in DL macrodiversity mode.

FIG. 15 is a table of an exemplary format of an exemplary 3 bit downlink delta SNR report (DLDSNR3).

FIG. 16 is a table of an exemplary format for an exemplary 1 bit uplink request (ULRQST1) report.

FIG. 17 is an exemplary table used to calculate exemplary control parameters y and z, the control parameters y and z being used in determining uplink multi-bit request reports conveying transmission request group queue information.

FIG. 18 is a table identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary first request dictionary (RD reference number=0).

FIG. 19 is a table identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary first request dictionary (RD reference number=0).

FIG. 20 is a table identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary second request dictionary (RD reference number=1).

FIG. 21 is a table identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary second request dictionary (RD reference number=1).

FIG. 22 is a table identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary third request dictionary (RD reference number=2).

FIG. 23 is a table identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary third request dictionary (RD reference number=2).

FIG. 24 is a table identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary fourth request dictionary (RD reference number=3).

FIG. 25 is a table identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary fourth request dictionary (RD reference number=3).

FIG. 26 is a table identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 32 bit patterns for an exemplary 5 bit uplink transmitter power backoff report (ULTxBKF5), in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 27 includes an exemplary power scaling factor table relating tone block power tier number to power scaling factor, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 28 is an exemplary uplink loading factor table used in communicating base station sector loading information, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 29 is a table illustrating an exemplary format for a 4 bit downlink beacon ratio report (DLBNR4), in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 30 is a drawing of an exemplary table describing the format of an exemplary 4 bit downlink self-noise saturation level of SNR report (DLSSNR4), in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 31 is a drawing of a table illustrating an example of mapping between indicator report information bits and the type of report carried by the corresponding flexible report.

FIG. 32 is a drawing illustrating an exemplary default mode of the split tone format in a beaconslot for a given DCCH tone for an exemplary wireless terminal.

FIG. 33 illustrates an exemplary definition of the default mode in the split-tone format of the uplink DCCH segments in the first uplink superslot after the WT migrates to the ON state.

FIG. 34 provides an exemplary summary list of dedicated control reports (DCRs) in the split-tone format for the default mode.

FIG. 35 is a table identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for an exemplary 4 bit uplink transmission backoff report (ULTxBKF4), in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 36 is an example of mapping between indicator report information bits and the type of report carried by the corresponding flexible report.

FIG. 37 is an exemplary specification of uplink dedicated control channel segment modulation coding in full-tone format.

FIG. 38 is a drawing of a table illustrating an exemplary specification of uplink dedicated control channel segment modulation coding in split-tone format.

FIG. 39 is a drawing of a table illustrating exemplary wireless terminal uplink traffic channel frame request group queue count information.

FIG. 40 includes drawings illustrating an exemplary set of four request group queues being maintained by a wireless terminal and drawings illustrating exemplary mappings of uplink data stream traffic flows to request queues for two exemplary wireless terminals, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment.

FIG. 41 illustrates an exemplary request group queue structure, multiple request dictionaries, a plurality of types of uplink traffic channel request reports, and grouping of sets of queues in accordance with exemplary formats used for each of the types of reports.

FIG. 42, comprising the combination of FIG. 42A, FIG. 42B, FIG. 42C, FIG. 42D, and FIG. 42E is a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal to report control information in accordance with various embodiments.

FIGS. 45 and 46 are used to illustrate the use of an initial control information report set in an exemplary embodiment.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a communications device in accordance with various embodiments; the communications device including information indicating a predetermined report sequence for use in controlling the transmission of a plurality of different control information reports on a recurring basis.

FIG. 48 illustrates two exemplary different formats of initial control channel information report sets, the different format report sets including at least one segment conveying different sets of reports, in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 49 illustrates a plurality of different initial control information report sets in accordance with various embodiments, the different initial control information report sets having different numbers of segments.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 51 is a drawing illustrating exemplary full-tone DCCH mode segments and exemplary split-tone DCCH mode segments allocated to exemplary wireless terminals, in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a drawing of an exemplary method of operating a base station in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 53 is a drawing illustrating exemplary full-tone DCCH mode segments and exemplary split-tone DCCH mode segments allocated to exemplary wireless terminals, in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 54 is a drawing of a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 55 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 56 is a drawing of an exemplary base station, e.g., access node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 57 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 58 is a drawing of an exemplary base station, e.g., access node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 59 comprising the combination of FIG. 59A, FIG. 59B and FIG. 59C is a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal to provide transmission power information to a base station in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 61 is a table of an exemplary format for an exemplary 1 bit uplink request (ULRQST1) report.

FIG. 62 is an exemplary table used to calculate exemplary control parameters y and z, the control parameters y and z being used in determining uplink multi-bit request reports conveying transmission request group queue information.

FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 define an exemplary request dictionary with the RD reference number equal to 0.

FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 includes tables which define an exemplary request dictionary with the RD reference number equal to 1.

FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 include tables which define an exemplary request dictionary with the RD reference number equal to 2.

FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 include tables which define an exemplary request dictionary with the RD reference number equal to 3.

FIG. 71 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 72 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 73 illustrates exemplary mapping for an exemplary wireless terminal of uplink data stream traffic flows to its request group queues at different times in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 74 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 75 is a drawing used to explain features of an exemplary embodiment using a wireless terminal transmission power report.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal, e.g., mobile node, to report transmission backlog information.

FIG. 77 comprising the combination of FIG. 77A, FIG. 77B and FIG. 77C is a drawing of a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal, e.g., mobile node, to report transmission backlog information.

FIG. 78 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 79 comprising the combination of FIG. 79A and FIG. 79B is a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a base station in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 80 comprising the combination of FIG. 80A, FIG. 80B and FIG. 80C is a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a base station in accordance with various embodiments.

FIG. 81 is a drawing of an exemplary base station implemented in accordance with various embodiments.

SUMMARY

Methods and apparatus for communicating transmission backlog information efficiently are described. Reporting control factors are utilized to expand reporting possibilities for a fixed bit size request report.

In some but not necessarily all embodiments, a reporting control factor is determined as a function of at least one of: channel quality information, power information, device capability information, quality of service information, and a communicated parameter. In some implementations at least one transmission backlog report value is interpreted as a function of a reporting control factor. Accordingly, the same report value may be interpreted differently depending on the reporting control factor used to interpret the report value. In some embodiments, a wide range of quantization schemes for reporting transmission backlog information are facilitated corresponding to a small bit size report. The small bit size report may be, e.g., a report less than 5 bits in size such as a 4 bit uplink traffic request report. While embodiments with small bit size reports are possible and are often preferable, other larger size reports may be implemented depending on the embodiment.

In some such embodiments, a communications device, e.g., a wireless terminal such as a mobile node, can adaptively select a quantization request level closely matched to its current needs such as to provide an accurate representation of its current traffic channel resource needs. A communications device, e.g., a wireless terminal, in some embodiments, may request a number of frames in a request report and the same report may be indirectly requesting a number of communications segments needed to clear its transmission backlog, e.g., user data waiting to be transmitted.

In some but not necessarily all embodiments, a communications device receiving a request report, e.g., a base station, determines the control factor corresponding to a request report and performs an interpretation of a received report value as a function of the determined control parameter value. Various information, e.g., beacon ratio report information and/or wireless terminal power availability information, already available to both the wireless terminal and base station for other purposes, may be utilized to generate one or more reporting control factors.

An exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal to report transmission backlog information includes: (i) generating at least one reporting control factor as a function of at least one of: channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information; and (ii) mapping a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor. An exemplary wireless terminal, in accordance with some embodiments, includes: a control factor generation module for generating a control factor as a function of at least one of: channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information; and a mapping module for mapping a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor.

An exemplary method of operating a base station in some embodiments includes: receiving a transmission backlog report communicating a report value; determining a reporting control factor corresponding to said received backlog report, said reporting control factor being a function of at least one of: channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information; and interpreting the received report value as a function of the determined reporting control factor. An exemplary base station, in some exemplary embodiments includes: a receiver module for receiving a transmission backlog report from a wireless terminal, the transmission backlog report communicating a report value; a reporting control factor determination module for determining a value of a reporting control factor, said reporting control factor being a function of at least one of: channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information; and a report interpretation module for interpreting said received report value as a function of a determined reporting control factor.

While various embodiments have been discussed in the summary above, it should be appreciated that not necessarily all embodiments include the same features and some of the features described above are not necessary but can be desirable in some embodiments. Numerous additional features, embodiments and benefits of the various embodiments are discussed in the detailed description which follows.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

FIG. 1 shows an exemplary communication system 100 implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary communications system 100 includes multiple cells: cell 1 102, cell M 104. Exemplary system 100 is, e.g., an exemplary orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) spread spectrum wireless communications system such as a multiple access OFDM system. Each cell 102, 104 of exemplary system 100 includes three sectors. Cells which have not be subdivided into multiple sectors (N=1), cells with two sectors (N=2) and cells with more than 3 sectors (N>3) are also possible in accordance with various embodiments. Each sector supports one or more carriers and/or downlink tones blocks. In some embodiments, each downlink tone block has a corresponding uplink tone block. In some embodiments at least some of the sectors support three downlink tones blocks. Cell 102 includes a first sector, sector 1 110, a second sector, sector 2 112, and a third sector, sector 3 114. Similarly, cell M 104 includes a first sector, sector 1 122, a second sector, sector 2 124, and a third sector, sector 3 126. Cell 1 102 includes a base station (BS), base station 1 106, and a plurality of wireless terminals (WTs) in each sector 110, 112, 114. Sector 1 110 includes WT(1) 136 and WT(N) 138 coupled to dBS 106 via wireless links 140, 142, respectively; sector 2 112 includes WT(1′) 144 and WT(N′) 146 coupled to BS 106 via wireless links 148, 150, respectively; sector 3 114 includes WT(1″) 152 and WT(N″) 154 coupled to BS 106 via wireless links 156, 158, respectively. Similarly, cell M 104 includes base station M 108, and a plurality of wireless terminals (WTs) in each sector 122, 124, 126. Sector 1 122 includes WT(1″″) 168 and WT(N″″) 170 coupled to BS M 108 via wireless links 180, 182, respectively; sector 2 124 includes WT(1′″″) 172 and WT(N′″″) 174 coupled to BS M 108 via wireless links 184, 186, respectively; sector 3 126 includes WT(1″″″) 176 and WT(N″″″) 178 coupled to BS M 108 via wireless links 188, 190, respectively.

System 100 also includes a network node 160 which is coupled to BS1 106 and BS M 108 via network links 162, 164, respectively. Network node 160 is also coupled to other network nodes, e.g., other base stations, AAA server nodes, intermediate nodes, routers, etc. and the Internet via network link 166. Network links 162, 164, 166 may be, e.g., fiber optic cables. Each wireless, e.g. WT 1 136, includes a transmitter as well as a receiver. At least some of the wireless terminals, e.g., WT(1) 136, are mobile nodes which may move through system 100 and may communicate via wireless links with the base station in the cell in which the WT is currently located, e.g., using a base station sector attachment point. The wireless terminals, (WTs), e.g. WT(1) 136, may communicate with peer nodes, e.g., other WTs in system 100 or outside system 100 via a base station, e.g. BS 106, and/or network node 160. WTs, e.g., WT(1) 136 may be mobile communications devices such as cell phones, personal data assistants with wireless modems, laptop computers with wireless modems, data terminals with wireless modems, etc.

FIG. 2 illustrates an exemplary base station 12, implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary base station 12 may be any of the exemplary base stations of FIG. 1. The base station 12 includes antennas 203, 205 and receiver transmitter modules 202, 204. The receiver module 202 includes a decoder 233 while the transmitter module 204 includes an encoder 235. The modules 202, 204 are coupled by a bus 230 to an I/O interface 208, processor (e.g., CPU) 206 and memory 210. The I/O interface 208 couples the base station 12 to other network nodes and/or the Internet. The memory 210 includes routines, which when executed by the processor 206, causes the base station 12 to operate. Memory 210 includes communications routines 223 used for controlling the base station 12 to perform various communications operations and implement various communications protocols. The memory 210 also includes a base station control routine 225 used to control the base station 12 to implement the steps of methods. The base station control routine 225 includes a scheduling module 226 used to control transmission scheduling and/or communication resource allocation. Thus, module 226 may serve as a scheduler. Base station control routine 225 also includes dedicated control channel modules 227 which implement methods, e.g., processing received DCCH reports, performing control related to DCCH mode, allocating DCCH segments, etc. Memory 210 also includes information used by communications routines 223, and control routine 225. The data/information 212 includes a set of data/information for a plurality of wireless terminal (WT 1 data/info 213, WT N data/info 213′. WT 1 data/information 213 includes mode information 231, DCCH report information 233, resource information 235 and sessions information 237. Data/information 212 also includes system data/information 229.

FIG. 3 illustrates an exemplary wireless terminal 14, e.g., mobile node implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary wireless terminal 14 may be any of the exemplary wireless terminals of FIG. 1. The wireless terminal 14, e.g., mobile node may be used as a mobile terminal (MT). The wireless terminal 14 includes receiver and transmitter antennas 303, 305 which are coupled to receiver and transmitter modules 302, 304 respectively. The receiver module 302 includes a decoder 333 while the transmitter module 304 includes an encoder 335. The receiver/transmitter modules 302, 304 are coupled by a bus 305 to a memory 310. Processor 306, under control of one or more routines stored in memory 310 causes the wireless terminal 14 to operate. In order to control wireless terminal operation memory 310 includes communications routine 323 and wireless terminal control routine 325. Communications routine 323 is used for controlling the wireless terminal 14 to perform various communications operations and implement various communications protocols. The wireless terminal control routine 325 is responsible for insuring that the wireless terminal operates in accordance with the methods and performs the steps in regard to wireless terminal operations. Wireless terminal control routine 325 includes DCCH modules 327, which implement methods, e.g., control the performing of measurements used in DCCH reports, generate DCCH reports, control transmission of DCCH reports, control DCCH mode, etc. The memory 310 also includes user/device/session/resource information 312 which may be accessed and used to implement the methods and/or data structures. Information 312 includes DCCH report information 330 and mode information 332. Memory 310 also includes system data/information 329, e.g., including uplink and downlink channel structure information.

FIG. 4 is a drawing 400 of exemplary uplink dedicated control channel (DCCH) segments in an exemplary uplink timing and frequency structure in an exemplary orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) multiple access wireless communications system. The uplink dedicated control channel is used to send Dedicated Control Reports (DCR) from wireless terminals to base stations. Vertical axis 402 plots logical uplink tone index while horizontal axis 404 plots the uplink index of the halfslot within a beaconslot. In this example, an uplink tone block includes 113 logical uplink tones indexed (0, . . . , 112); there are seven successive OFDM symbol transmission time periods within a halfslot, 2 additional OFDM symbol time periods followed by 16 successive half-slots within a superslot, and 8 successive superslots within a beacon slot. The first 9 OFDM symbol transmission time periods within a superslot are an access interval, and the dedicated control channel does not use the air link resources of the access interval.

The exemplary dedicated control channel is subdivided into 31 logical tones (uplink tone index 81 406, uplink tone index 82 408, . . . , uplink tone index 111 410). Each logical uplink tone (81, . . . , 111) in the logical uplink frequency structure corresponds to a logical tone indexed with respect to the DCCH channel (0, . . . , 30).

For each tone in the dedicated control channel there are 40 segments in the beaconslot corresponding to forty columns (412, 414, 416, 418, 420, 422, . . . , 424). The segment structure repeats on a beaconslot basis. For a given tone in the dedicated control channel there are 40 segments corresponding to a beaconslot 428; each of the eight superslots of the beaconslot includes 5 successive segments for the given tone. For example, for first superslot 426 of beaconslot 428, corresponding to tone 0 of the DCCH, there are five indexed segments (segment [0][0], segment [0][1], segment [0][2], segment [0][3], segment [0][4]). Similarly, for first superslot 426 of beaconslot 428, corresponding to tone 1 of the DCCH, there are five indexed segments (segment [1][0], segment [1][1], segment [1][2], segment [1][3], segment [1][4]). Similarly, for first superslot 426 of beaconslot 428, corresponding to tone 30 of the DCCH, there are five indexed segments (segment [30][0], segment [30][1], segment [30][2], segment [30][3], segment [30][4]).

In this example each segment, e.g., segment [0][0], comprises one tone for 3 successive half-slots, e.g., representing an allocated uplink air link resource of 21 OFDM tone-symbols. In some embodiments, logical uplink tones are hopped to physical tones in accordance with an uplink tone hopping sequence such that the physical tone associated with a logical tone may be different for successive half-slots, but remains constant during a given half-slot.

In some embodiments, a set of uplink dedicated control channel segments corresponding to a given tone can use one of a plurality of different formats. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, for a given tone for a beaconslot, the set of DCCH segments can use one of two formats: split tone format and full-tone format. In the full tone format, the set of uplink DCCH segments corresponding to a tone are used by a single wireless terminal. In the split tone format, the set of uplink DCCH segment corresponding to the tone are shared by up to three wireless terminals in a time division multiplexing manner. The base station and/or the wireless terminal can, in some embodiments, change the format for a given DCCH tone, using predetermined protocols. The format of the uplink DCCH segments corresponding to a different DCCH tone can, in some embodiments, be independently set and may be different.

In some embodiments, in either format, the wireless terminal shall support a default mode of the uplink dedicated control channel segments. In some embodiments, the wireless terminal supports the default mode of the uplink dedicated control channel segments and one or more additional modes of the uplink dedicated control channel segments. Such a mode defines the interpretation of the information bits in the uplink dedicated control channel segments. The base station and/or the WT can, in some embodiments, change the mode, e.g., using an upper layer configuration protocol. In various embodiments, the uplink DCCH segments corresponding to a different tone or those corresponding to the same tone but used by different WTs can be independently set and may be different.

FIG. 5 includes a drawing 500 of an exemplary dedicated control channel in an exemplary uplink timing and frequency structure in an exemplary orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) multiple access wireless communications system. Drawing 500 may represent the DCCH 400 of FIG. 4, at a time when each set of DCCH segments corresponding to a tone is in the full-tone format. Vertical axis 502 plots logical tone index of the DCCH while horizontal axis 504 plots the uplink index of the halfslot within a beaconslot. The exemplary dedicated control channel is subdivided into 31 logical tones (tone index 0 506, tone index 1 508, . . . , tone index 30 510). For each tone in the dedicated control channel there are 40 segments in the beaconslot corresponding to forty columns (512, 514, 516, 518, 520, 522, . . . , 524). Each logical tone of the dedicated control channel may be assigned by the base station to a different wireless terminal using the base station as its current point of attachment. For example, logical (tone 0 506, tone 1 508, . . . , tone 30 510) may be currently assigned to (WT A 530, WT B 532, . . . , WT N′ 534), respectively.

FIG. 6 includes a drawing 600 of an exemplary dedicated control channel in an exemplary uplink timing and frequency structure in an exemplary orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) multiple access wireless communications system. Drawing 600 may represent the DCCH 400 of FIG. 4, at a time when each set of DCCH segments corresponding to a tone is in the split-tone format. Vertical axis 602 plots logical tone index of the DCCH while horizontal axis 604 plots the uplink index of the halfslot within a beaconslot. The exemplary dedicated control channel is subdivided into 31 logical tones (tone index 0 606, tone index 1 608, . . . , tone index 30 610). For each tone in the dedicated control channel there are 40 segments in the beaconslot corresponding to forty columns (612, 614, 616, 618, 620, 622, . . . , 624). Each logical tone of the dedicated control channel may be assigned by the base station to up to 3 different wireless terminals using the base station as their current point of attachment. For a given tone, the segments alternate between the three wireless terminals, with 13 segments being allocated for each of the three wireless terminals, and the 40^(th) segment is reserved. This exemplary division of air link resources of the DCCH channel represents a total of 93 different wireless terminals being allocated DCCH channel resources for the exemplary beaconslot. For example, logical tone 0 606 may be currently assigned to and shared by WT A 630, WT B 632, and WT C 634; logical tone 1 608 may be currently assigned to and shared by WT D 636, WT E 638, and WT F 640; logical tone 30 610 may be currently assigned to WT M′″ 642, WT N′″ 644, and WT O′″ 646. For the beaconslot, each of the exemplary WTs (630, 632, 634, 636, 638, 640, 642, 644, 646) is allocated 13 DCCH segments.

FIG. 7 includes a drawing 700 of an exemplary dedicated control channel in an exemplary uplink timing and frequency structure in an exemplary orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) multiple access wireless communications system. Drawing 700 may represent the DCCH 400 of FIG. 4, at a time when some of the sets of DCCH segments corresponding to a tone are in the full-tone format and some of the sets of DCCH segments corresponding to a tone are in the split-tone format. Vertical axis 702 plots logical tone index of the DCCH while horizontal axis 704 plots the uplink index of the halfslot within a beaconslot. The exemplary dedicated control channel is subdivided into 31 logical tones (tone index 0 706, tone index 1 708, tone index 2 709, . . . , tone index 30 710). For each tone in the dedicated control channel there are 40 segments in the beaconslot corresponding to forty columns (712, 714, 716, 718, 720, 722, . . . , 724). In this example, the set of segments corresponding to logical tone 0 708 is in split-tone format and is currently assigned to and shared by WT A 730, WT B 732, and WTC 734, each receiving 13 segments with one segment being reserved. The set of segments corresponding to logical tone 1 708 is also in split-tone format, but is currently assigned to and shared by two WTs, WT D 736, WT E 738, each receiving 13 segments. For tone 1 708, there is a set of 13 unassigned segments, and one reserved segment. The set of segments corresponding to logical tone 2 709 is also in split-tone format, but is currently assigned to one WT, WT F 739, receiving 13 segments. For tone 2 709, there are two sets with 13 unassigned segments per set, and one reserved segment. The set of segments corresponding to logical tone 30 710 is in full-tone format and is currently assigned to WT P′ 740, with WTP′ 740 receiving the full 40 segments to use.

FIG. 8 is a drawing 800 illustrating the use of format and mode in an exemplary uplink DCCH in accordance with various embodiments, the mode defining the interpretation of the information bits in the DCCH segments. Row 802, corresponding to one tone of the DCCH, illustrates 15 successive segments of the DCCH, in which the split tone-format is used and thus the tone is shared by three wireless terminals, and the mode used by any one of the three WTs can be different. Meanwhile, row 804 illustrates 15 successive DCCH segments using the full tone format and is used by a single wireless terminal. Legend 805 indicates that: segments with vertical line shading 806 are used by a 1^(st) WT user, segments with diagonal line shading 808 are used by a 2^(nd) WT user, segments with horizontal line shading 810 are used by a 3^(rd) WT user, and segments with crosshatch shading 812 are used by a 4^(th) WT user.

FIG. 9 illustrates several examples corresponding to drawing 800 illustrating different modes of operation. In the example of drawing 900, 1^(st), 2^(nd) and 3^(rd) WTs are sharing a DCCH tone in the split tone format while the 4^(th) WT is using a tone in the full tone format. Each of the WTs corresponding to the example of drawing 900 are using the default mode of uplink dedicated control channel segments, following a default mode interpretation of the information bits in the DCCH segments. The default mode for split tone format (D_(S)) is different than the default mode for full tone format (D_(F)).

In the example of drawing 920, 1^(st), 2^(nd) and 3^(rd) WTs are sharing a DCCH tone in the split tone format while the 4^(th) WT is using a tone in the full tone format. Each of the (1^(st), 2^(nd), and 3^(rd)) WTs corresponding to the example of drawing 920 are using different modes of uplink dedicated control channel segments, each following different interpretations of the information bits in the DCCH segments. The 1^(st) WT is using mode 2 for split-tone format, the 2^(nd) wireless terminal is using the default mode for split-tone format, and the 3rd WT is using mode 1 for split-tone format. In addition the 4^(th) WT is using the default mode for full-tone format.

In the example of drawing 940, 1^(st), 2^(nd) and 3^(rd) WTs are sharing a DCCH tone in the split tone format while the 4^(th) WT is using a tone in the full tone format. Each of the (1^(st), 2^(nd), 3^(rd), and 4^(th)) WTs corresponding to the example of drawing 940 are using different modes of uplink dedicated control channel segments, each following different interpretations of the information bits in the DCCH segments. The 1^(st) WT is using mode 2 for split-tone format, the 2^(nd) wireless terminal is using the default mode for split-tone format, the 3rd WT is using mode 1 for split tone format, and the 4^(th) WT is using mode 3 for full-tone format.

FIG. 10 is a drawing 1099 illustrating an exemplary default mode of the full tone format in a beaconslot for a given DCCH tone. In FIG. 10, each block (1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010, 1011, 1012, 1013, 1014, 1015, 1016, 1017, 1018, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023, 1024, 1025, 1026, 1027, 1028, 1029, 1030, 1031, 1032, 1033, 1034, 1035, 1036, 1037, 1038, 1039) represents one segment whose index s2 (0, . . . , 39) is shown above the block in rectangular region 1040. Each block, e.g., block 1000 representing segment 0, conveys 6 information bits; each block comprises 6 rows corresponding to the 6 bits in the segment, where the bits are listed from the most significant bit to the least significant bit downwards from the top row to the bottom row as shown in rectangular region 1043.

For the exemplary embodiment, the framing format shown in FIG. 10 is used repeatedly in every beaconslot, when the default mode of full-tone format is used, with the following exception. In the first uplink superslot after the wireless terminal migrates to the ON state in the current connection, the WT shall use the framing format shown in FIG. 11. The first uplink superslot is defined: for a scenario when the WT migrates to the ON state from the ACCESS state, for a scenario when the WT migrates to the ON state from a HOLD state, and for a scenario when the WT migrates to the ON state from the ON state of another connection.

FIG. 11 illustrates an exemplary definition of the default mode in the full-tone format of the uplink DCCH segments in the first uplink superslot after the WT migrates to the ON state. Drawing 1199 includes five successive segments (1100, 1101, 1102, 1103, 1104) corresponding to segment index numbers, s2=(0, 1, 2, 3, 4), respectively in the superslot as indicated by rectangle 1106 above the segments. Each block, e.g., block 1100 representing segment 0 of the superslot, conveys 6 information bits; each block comprises 6 rows corresponding to the 6 bits in the segment, where the bits are listed from the most significant bit to the least significant bit downwards from the top row to the bottom row as shown in rectangular region 1108.

In the exemplary embodiment, in the scenario of migrating from the HOLD to ON state, the WT starts to transmit the uplink DCCH channel from the beginning of the first UL superslot, and therefore the first uplink DCCH segment shall transport the information bits in the leftmost information column of FIG. 11, the information bits of segment 1100. In the exemplary embodiment, in the scenario of migrating from the ACCESS state, the WT does not necessarily start from the beginning of the first UL superslot, but does still transmit the uplink DCCH segments according to the framing format specified in FIG. 11. For example, if the WT starts to transmit the UL DCCH segments from the halfslot of the superslot with index=4, then the WT skips the leftmost information column of FIG. 11 (segment 1100) and the first uplink DCCH segment transports the second leftmost column (segment 1101). Note that in the exemplary embodiment, superslot indexed halfslots (1-3) correspond to one DCCH segment (1100) and superslot indexed halfslots (4-6) correspond to the next segment (1101). In the exemplary embodiment, for the scenario of switching between the full-tone and split-tone formats, the WT uses the framing format shown in FIG. 10 without the above exception of using the format shown in FIG. 11.

Once, the first UL superslot ends, the uplink DCCH channel segments switch to the framing format of FIG. 10. Depending on where the first uplink superslot ends, the point of switching the framing format may or may not be the beginning of a beaconslot. Note that in this example embodiment, there are five DCCH segments for a given DCCH tone for a superslot. For example, suppose that the first uplink superslot is of uplink beaconslot superslot index=2, where beaconslot superslot index range is from 0 to 7. Subsequently in the next uplink superslot, which is of uplink beaconslot superslot index=3, the first uplink DCCH segment using the default framing format of FIG. 10 is of index s2=15 (segment 1015 of FIG. 10) and transports the information corresponding to segment s2=15 (segment 1015 of FIG. 10).

Each uplink DCCH segment is used to transmit a set of Dedicated Control Channel Reports (DCRs). An exemplary summary list of DCRs in the full-tone format for the default mode is given in table 1200 FIG. 12. The information of table 1200 is applicable to the partitioned segments of FIGS. 10 and 11. Each segment of FIGS. 10 and 11 includes two or more reports as described in table 1200. First column 1202 of table 1200 describes abbreviated names used for each exemplary report. The name of each report ends with a number which specifies the number of bits of the DCR. Second column 1204 of table 1200 briefly describes each named report. Third column 1206 specifies the segment index s2 of FIG. 10, in which a DCR is to be transmitted, and corresponds to a mapping between table 1200 and FIG. 10.

The exemplary 5 bit absolute report of downlink signal to noise ratio (DLSNR5) shall now be described. The exemplary DLSNR5 uses one of the following two mode formats. When the WT has only one connection, the non-DL macrodiversity mode format is used. When the WT has multiple connections, the DL-macrodiversity mode format is used if the WT is in the DL-macrodiversity mode; otherwise the non-macrodiversity mode format is used. In some embodiments, whether the WT is in the DL-macrodiversity mode and/or how the WT switches between the DL macrodiversity mode and the non-DL macrodiversity mode are specified in an upper layer protocol. In the non-DL macro-diversity mode the WT reports the measured received downlink pilot channel segment SNR using the closest representation of Table 1300 of FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a table 1300 of an exemplary format of DLSNR5 in non-DL macrodiversity mode. First column 1302 list 32 possible bit pattern that may be represented by the 5 bits of the report. Second column 1304 lists the value of wtDLPICHSNR being communicated to the base station via the report. In this example, incremental levels from −12 dB to 29 dB can be indicated corresponding to 31 different bit patterns, while bit pattern 11111 is reserved.

For example, if the calculated wtDLPICHSNR based on measurement is −14 dB, the DLSNR5 report is set to bit pattern 00000; if the calculated wtDLPICHSNR based on measurement is −11.6 dB, the DLSNR5 report is set to bit pattern 00000 because in table 1300 the entry with −12 dB is the closet to the calculated value of −11.6 dB; if the calculated wtDLPICHSNR based on measurement is −11.4 dB, the DLSNR5 report is set to bit pattern 00001 because in table 1300 the entry with −11 dB is the closet to the calculated value of −11.4 dB.

The reported wireless terminal downlink pilot SNR (wtDLPICHSNR) accounts for the fact that the pilot signal, on which the SNR is measured, is typically transmitted at higher power than the average traffic channel power. For this reason, the pilot SNR is, in some embodiments, reported as,

wtDLPICHSNR=PilotSNR−Delta,

where pilotSNR is the measured SNR on the received downlink pilot channel signal in dB, and Delta is a difference between the pilot transmission power and an average per tone channel transmission power level, e.g. the average per tone downlink traffic channel transmission power. In some embodiments Delta=7.5 dB.

In the DL-macrodiversity mode format the WT uses the DLSNR5 report to inform a base station sector attachment point, whether the current downlink connection with the base station sector attachment point is a preferred connection, and to report the calculated wtDLPICHSNR with the closest DLSNR5 report according to table 1400. FIG. 14 is a table 1400 of an exemplary format of DLSNR5 in DL macrodiversity mode. First column 1402 list 32 possible bit patterns that may be represented by the 5 bits of the report. Second column 1404 lists the value of wtDLPICHSNR being communicated to the base station via the report and an indication as to whether or not the connection is preferred. In this example, incremental levels of SNR from −12 db to 13 dB can be indicated corresponding to 32 different bit patterns. Sixteen of the bit patterns correspond to the case where the connection is not preferred; while the remaining sixteen bit patterns correspond to the case where the connection is preferred. In some exemplary embodiments, the highest SNR value that can be indicated when a link is preferred is greater than the highest SNR value that can be indicated when a link is not preferred. In some exemplary embodiments, the lowest SNR that can be indicated when a link is preferred is greater than the lowest SNR value that can be indicated when a link is not preferred.

In some embodiments, in the DL-macrodiversity mode, the wireless terminal indicates one and only one connection to be the preferred connection at any given time. Furthermore, in some such embodiments, if the WT indicates that a connection is preferred in a DLSNR5 report, then the WT sends at least NumConsecutive Preferred consecutive DLSNR5 reports indicating that the connection is preferred before the WT is allowed to a send a DLSNR5 report indicating that another connection becomes the preferred one. The value of the parameter NumConsecutive preferred depends on the format of the uplink DCCH channel, e.g., full-tone format vs split-tone format). In some embodiments the WT gets the parameter NumConsecutivePreferred in an upper level protocol. In some embodiments, the default value of NumConsecutivePreferred is 10 in the full-tone format.

An exemplary 3 bit relative (difference) report of downlink SNR (DLDSNR3) shall now be described. The wireless terminal measures the received SNR of the downlink pilot channel (PilotSNR), calculates the wtDLPICHSNR value,where wtDLPICHSNR=PilotSNR−Delta, calculates the difference between the calculated wtDLPICHSNR value and the reported value by the most recent DLSNR5 report, and reports the calculated difference with the closest DLDSNR3 report according to table 1500 of FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a table 1500 of an exemplary format of DLDSNR3. First column 1502 lists 9 possible bit patterns that may represent the 3 information bits of the report. Second column 1504 lists the reported difference in wtDLPICHSNR being communicated to the base station via the report ranging from −5 dB to 5 dB.

Various exemplary uplink traffic channel request reports will now be described. In an exemplary embodiment three types of uplink traffic channel request reports are used: an exemplary single bit uplink traffic channel request report (ULRQST1), an exemplary three bit uplink traffic channel request report (ULRQST3), and an exemplary four bit uplink traffic channel request report (ULRQST4). The WT uses an ULRQST1, ULRQST3, or ULRQST4 to report the status of the MAC frame queues at the WT transmitter. In the exemplary embodiment, the MAC frames are constructed from the LLC frames, which are constructed from packets of upper layer protocols. In this exemplary embodiment, any packet belongs to one of four request groups (RG0, RG1, RG2, or RG3). In some exemplary embodiments, the mapping of packets to request groups is done through higher layer protocols. In some exemplary embodiments, there is a default mapping of packets to request groups, that may be changed by the base station and/or WT through higher layer protocols. If the packet belongs to one request group, then, in this exemplary embodiment, all the MAC frames of that packet also belong to that same request group. The WT reports the number of MAC frames in the 4 request groups that the WT may intend to transmit. In the ARQ protocol, those MAC frames are marked as “new” or “to be retransmitted”. The WT maintains a vector of four elements N[0:3] for k=0:3, N[k] represents the number of MAC frames that the WT intends to transmit in request group k. The WT should report the information about N[0:3] to the base station sector so that the base station sector can utilize the information in an uplink scheduling algorithm to determine the assignment of uplink traffic channel segments.

In an exemplary embodiment, the WT uses the single bit uplink traffic channel request report (ULRQST1) to report N[0]+N[1] according to table 1600 of FIG. 16. Table 1600 is an exemplary format for an ULRQST1 report. First column 1602 indicates the two possible bit patterns that may be conveyed while second column 1604 indicates the meaning of each bit pattern. If the bit pattern is 0, that indicates that there are no MAC frames that the WT intends to transmit in either request group 0 or request group 1. If the bit pattern is 1, that indicates that the WT has at least one MAC frame in request group 0 or request group 1 that the WT intends to communicate.

In accordance with a feature used in various embodiments, multiple request dictionaries are supported. Such a request dictionary defines the interpretation of the information bits in uplink traffic channel request reports in the uplink dedicated control channel segments. At a given time, the WT uses one request dictionary. In some embodiments, when the WT just enters the ACTIVE state, the WT uses a default request dictionary. To change the request dictionary the WT and base station sector use an upper layer configuration protocol. In some embodiments, when the WT migrates from the ON state to the HOLD state, the WT keeps the last request dictionary used in the ON state so that when the WT migrates from the HOLD state to the ON state later, the WT continues to use the same request dictionary until the request dictionary is explicitly changed; however, if the WT leaves the ACTIVE state, then the memory of the last request dictionary is cleared. In some embodiments, the ACTIVE state includes the ON state and the Hold state, but does not include the ACCESS state and sleep state.

In some embodiments, to determine at least some ULRQST3 or ULRQST4 reports, the wireless terminal first calculates one or more of the following two control parameters y and z, and uses one of the request dictionaries, e.g., Request dictionary (RD) reference number 0, RD reference number 1, RD reference number 2, RD reference number 3. Table 1700 of FIG. 17 is an exemplary table used to calculate control parameters y and z. First column 1702 lists a condition; second column 1704 lists the corresponding value of output control parameter y; third column 1706 lists the corresponding value of output control parameter z. In first column 1702, x (in dBs) represents the value of the most recent 5 bit uplink transmit backoff report (ULTXBKF5) and the value b (in dBs) of the most recent 4 bit downlink beacon ratio report (DLBNR4). Given the input values of x and b from the most recent reports, the WT checks if the condition from first row 1710 is satisfied. If the test condition is satisfied, then the WT uses the corresponding y and z values of the row for calculating the ULRQST3 or ULRQST4. However, if the condition is not satisfied the testing continues with the next row 1712. Testing continues proceeding down the table 1700 in order from top to bottom (1710, 1712, 1714, 1716, 1718, 1720, 1722, 1724, 1726, 1728) until the condition listed in column 1702 for a given row is satisfied. The WT determines y and z as those from the first row in table 1700 for which the first column is satisfied. For example, if x=17 and b=1, then z=4 and y=1.

The WT, in some embodiments, uses an ULRQST3 or ULRQST4 to report the actual N[0:3] of the MAC frames queues according to a request dictionary. A request dictionary is identified by a request dictionary (RD) reference number.

In some embodiments, at least some request dictionaries are such that any ULRQST4 or ULRQST3 may not completely include the actual N[0:3]. A report is in effect a quantized version of the actual N[0:3]. In some embodiments, the WT sends a report to minimize the discrepancy between the reported and actual MAC frame queues first for request group 0 and 1, and then for request group 2, and finally for request group 3. However, in some embodiments, the WT has the flexibility of determining a report to benefit the WT most. For example, assume that the WT is using exemplary request dictionary 1 (See FIGS. 20 and 21), the WT may use an ULRQST4 to report N[1]+N[3] and use an ULRQST3 to report N[2] and N[0]. In addition if a report is directly related to a subset of request groups according to the request dictionary, it does not automatically imply that MAC frame queues of a remaining request group are empty. For example, if a report means N[2]=1, then it may not automatically imply that N[0]=0, N[1]=0, or N[3]=0.

FIG. 18 is a table 1800 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary first request dictionary (RD reference number=0). In some embodiments, the request dictionary with reference number=0 is the default request dictionary. First column 1802 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 1804 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. An ULRQST4 of table 1800 conveys one of: (i) no change from the previous 4 bit uplink request, (ii) information about the N[0], and (iii) information about a composite of N[1]+N[2]+N[3] as a function of either control parameter y or control parameter z of table 1700 of FIG. 17.

FIG. 19 is a table 1900 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary first request dictionary (RD reference number=0). In some embodiments, the request dictionary with reference number=0 is the default request dictionary. First column 1902 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 1904 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. An ULRQST3 of table 1900 conveys: (i) information about the N[0] and (ii) information about a composite of N[1]+N[2]+N[3] as a function of control parameter y of table 1700 of FIG. 17.

FIG. 20 is a table 2000 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary second request dictionary (RD reference number=1). First column 2002 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 2004 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. An ULRQST4 of table 2000 conveys one of: (i) no change from the previous 4 bit uplink request, (ii) information about the N[2], and (iii)information about a composite of N[1]+N[3] as a function of either control parameter y or control parameter z of table 1700 of FIG. 17.

FIG. 21 is a table 2100 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary second request dictionary (RD reference number=1). First column 2102 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 2104 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. An ULRQST3 of table 2100 conveys: (i) information about N[0] and (ii) information about N[2].

FIG. 22 is a table 2200 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary third request dictionary (RD reference number=2). First column 2202 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 2204 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. An ULRQST4 of table 2200 conveys one of: (i) no change from the previous 4 bit uplink request, (ii) information about the N[1], and (iii) information about a composite of N[2]+N[3] as a function of either control parameter y or control parameter z of table 1700 of FIG. 17.

FIG. 23 is a table 2300 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary third request dictionary (RD reference number=2). First column 2302 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 2304 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. An ULRQST3 of table 2300 conveys: (i) information about N[0] and (ii) information about N[1].

FIG. 24 is a table 2400 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary fourth request dictionary (RD reference number=3). First column 2402 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 2404 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. An ULRQST4 of table 2400 conveys one of: (i) no change from the previous 4 bit uplink request, (ii) information about N[1], (iii) information about N[2], and (iv) information about N[3] as a function of either control parameter y or control parameter z of table 1700 of FIG. 17.

FIG. 25 is a table 2500 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary fourth request dictionary (RD reference number=3). First column 2502 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 2504 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. An ULRQST3 of table 2500 conveys: (i) information about N[0] and (ii) information about N[1].

In accordance with various embodiments, the methods facilitate a wide range of reporting possibilities. For example, the use of control parameters, e.g., based on SNR and backoff reports, allow for a single bit pattern request corresponding to a given dictionary to take on multiple interpretations. Consider exemplary request dictionary reference number 0 for 4 bit uplink requests as shown in table 1800 of FIG. 18. For a four bit request where each bit pattern corresponds to a fixed interpretations and does not rely on control parameters, 16 possibilities exists. However, in table 1800 four of the bit patterns (0011, 0100, 0101, and 0110) can each have two different interpretations since control parameter y can have value 1 or 2. Similarly, in table 1800 nine of the bit patterns (0111, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011, 1100, 1101, 1110, and 1111) can each have 10 different interpretations since control parameter z can have any of the values (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10). This use of control parameters expands the range of reporting for the 4 bit request report from 16 different possibilities to 111 possibilities.

An exemplary 5 bit wireless terminal transmitter power backoff report (ULTxBKF5) will now be described. A wireless terminal backoff report reports an amount of remaining power that the WT has to use for uplink transmissions for non-DCCH segments, e.g., including uplink traffic channel segment(s) after taking into account the power used to transmit the DCCH segments. wtULDCCHBackOff=wtPowerMax−wtULDCCHTxPower; where wtULDCCHTxPower denotes the per-tone transmission power of the uplink DCCH channel in dBm, and wtPowerMax is the maximum transmission power value of the WT, also in dBm. Note that the wtULDCCHTxPower represents the instantaneous power and is calculated using the wtPowerNominal in the halfslot immediately preceeding the current uplink DCCH segment. In some such embodiments, the per tone power of the uplink DCCH channel relative to wtPowerNominal is 0 dBs. The value of wtPowerMax depends on the device capability of the WT, upon system specifications and/or upon regulations. In some embodiments, the determination of wtPowerMax is implementation dependent.

FIG. 26 is a table 2600 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 32 bit patterns for an exemplary 5 bit uplink transmitter power backoff report (ULTxBKF5), in accordance with various embodiments. First column 2602 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 2604 identifies the reported WT uplink DCCH Backoff report values in dBs corresponding to each bit pattern. In this exemplary embodiment 30 distinct levels can be reported ranging from 6.5 dB to 40 dBs; two bit patterns are left as reserved. A wireless terminal calculates wtULDCCHBackoff, e.g., as indicated above, selects the closet entry in table 2600 and uses that bit pattern for the report.

An exemplary 4 bit downlink beacon ratio report (DLBNR4) will now be described. The beacon ratio report provides information which is a function of received measured downlink broadcast signals, e.g., beacon signals and/or pilot signals, from a serving base station sector and from one or more other interfering base station sectors. Qualitatively, the beacon ratio report can be used to estimate the relative proximity of the WT to other base station sectors. The beacon ratio report can be, and in some embodiments is, used at the serving BS sector in controlling the uplink rate of the WT to prevent excessive interference to other sectors. The beacon ratio report, in some embodiments, is based on two factors: (i) estimated channel gain ratios, denoted G_(i), and (ii) loading factors, denoted b_(i).

The channel gain ratios are defined, in some embodiments, as follows. In the tone block of the current connection, the WT, in some embodiments, determines an estimate of the ratio of the uplink channel gain from the WT to any interfering Base station sector i (BSS i) to the channel gain from the WT to the serving BSS. This ratio is denoted as G_(i). Typically, the uplink channel gain ratio is not directly measurable at the WT. However, since the uplink and downlink path gains are typically symmetric, the ratio can be estimated by comparing the relative received power of downlink signals from the serving and interfering BSSs. One possible choice for the reference downlink signal is the downlink beacon signal, which is well-suited for this purpose since it can be detected in very low SNR. In some embodiments, beacon signals have a higher per tone transmission power level than other downlink signals from a base station sector. Additionally, the characteristics of the beacon signal are such that precise timing synchronization is not necessary to detect and measure the beacon signal. For example, the beacon signal is, in some embodiments, a high power narrowband, e.g., single tone, two OFDM symbol transmission time period wide signal. Thus at certain locations, a WT is able to detect and measure a beacon signal from a base station sector, where the detection and/or measurement of other downlink broadcast signals, e.g., pilot signals may not be feasible. Using the beacon signal, the uplink path ratio would be given by G_(i)=PB_(i)/PB₀, where PB_(i) and PB₀ are, respectively, the measured received beacon power from the interfering and serving base station sectors, respectively.

Since the beacon is typically transmitted rather infrequently, the power measurement of the beacon signal may not provide a very accurate representation of average channel gain, especially in a fading environment where the power changes rapidly. For example, in some embodiments one beacon signal, which occupies 2 successive OFDM symbol transmission time periods in duration and which corresponds to a downlink tone block of a base station sector, is transmitted for every beaconslot of 912 OFDM symbol transmission time periods.

Pilot signals, on the other hand, are often transmitted much more frequently than beacon signals, e.g., in some embodiments pilot signals are transmitted during 896 out of the 912 OFDM symbol transmission time periods of a beaconslot. If the WT can detect the pilot signal from the BS sector, it can estimate the received beacon signal strength from the measured received pilot signal instead of using a beacon signal measurement. For example, if the WT can measure the received pilot power, PP_(i), of the interfering BS sector, then it can estimate the received beacon power PB_(i) from estimated PB_(i)=KZ_(i)PP_(i), where K is a nominal ratio of the beacon to pilot power of the interfering sector that is the same for each of the BS sectors, and Z_(i) is a scaling factor that is sector dependent.

Similarly, if the pilot signal power from the serving BS is measurable at the WT, then the received beacon power PB₀ can be estimated from the relation, estimated PB₀=KZ₀PP₀, where Z₀ and PP₀ are, respectively, the scaling factor and measured received pilot power from the serving base station sector.

Observe that if the received pilot signal strength is measurable corresponding to the serving base station sector, and the received beacon signal strength is measurable corresponding to interfering base station sector, the beacon ratio can be estimated from:

G _(i) =PB _(i)/(PP ₀ KZ ₀).

Observe that if the pilot strengths are measurable in both the serving and interfering sectors, the beacon ratio can be estimated from:

G _(i) =PP _(i) KZ _(i)/(PP ₀KZ₀)=PP _(i) Z _(i)/(PP ₀Z₀)

The scaling factors K, Z_(i) and Z₀ are either system constants, or can be inferred by the WT, from other information from the BS. In some embodiments, some of the scaling factors (K, Z_(i), Z₀) are system constants and some of the scaling factors (K, Z_(i), Z₀) are inferred by the WT, from other information form the BS.

In some multicarrier systems with different power levels on different carriers, the scaling factors, Z_(i) and Z₀, are a function of the downlink tone block. For example, an exemplary BSS has three power tier levels, and one of the three power tier levels is associated with each downlink tone block corresponding to a BSS attachment point. In some such embodiments, a different one of the three power tier levels is associated with each of the different tone blocks of the BSS. Continuing with the example, for the given BSS, each power tier level is associated with a nominal bss power level (e.g., one of bssPowerNominal0, bssPowerNominal1, and bssPowerNominal2) and the pilot channel signal is transmitted at a relative power level with respect to a nominal bss power level for the tone block, e.g., 7.2 dB above the nominal bss power level being used by the tone block; however, the beacon per tone relative transmission power level for the BSS is the same irrespective of the tone block from which the beacon is transmitted, e.g., 23.8 dB above the bss power level used by the power tier 0 block (bssPowerNominal0). Consequently, in this example for a given BSS, the beacon transmit power would be the same in each of the tone blocks, while the pilot transmit power is different, e.g. with the pilot transmit power of different tone blocks corresponding to different power tier levels. One set of scale factors for this example would be, K=23.8−7.2 dB, which is the ratio of the beacon to pilot power for tier 0, and Z_(i) is set to the relative nominal power of the tier of the interfering sector to the power of a tier 0 sector.

In some embodiments, the parameter Z₀ is determined from stored information, e.g., Table 2700 of FIG. 27, according to how the tone block of the current connection is used in the serving BSS as determined by the bssSectorType of the serving BSS. For example, if the tone block of the current connection is used as a tier 0 tone block by the serving BSS, the Z₀=1; if the tone block of the current connection is used as a tier 1 tone block by the serving BSS, the Z₀=bssPowerBackoff01; if the tone block of the current connection is used as a tier 2 tone block by the serving BSS, the Z₀=bssPowerBackoff02.

FIG. 27 includes exemplary power scaling factor table 2700, implemented in accordance with various embodiments. First column 2702 lists the use of the tone block as either a tier 0 tone block, tier 1 tone block, or tier 2 tone block. Second column 2704 lists the scaling factor associated with each tier (0, 1,2) tone block, as (1, bssPowerBackoff01, bssPowerBackoff02), respectively. In some embodiments, bssPowerBackoff01 is 6 dBs while bssPowerBackoff02 is 12 dB.

In some embodiments, the DCCH DLBNR4 report can be one of a generic beacon ratio report and a special beacon ratio report. In some such embodiments, a downlink traffic control channel, e.g., a DL.TCCH.FLASH channel, sends a special frame in a beaconslot, the special frame including a “Request for DLBNR4 report field”. That field can be used by the serving BSS to control the selection. For example, if the field is set to zero then, the WT reports a generic beacon ratio report; otherwise the WT reports the special beacon ratio report.

A generic beacon ratio report, in accordance with some embodiments, measures the relative interference cost the WT would generate to all the interfering beacons or the “closest” interfering beacon, if the WT were to transmit to the serving BSS in the current connection. A special beacon ratio report, in accordance with some embodiments, measures the relative interference cost the WT would generate to a specific BSS, if the WT were to transmit to the serving BSS in the current connection. The specific BSS is the one indicated using information received in the Request for DLBNR4 field of the special downlink frame. For example, in some embodiments, the specific BSS is the one whose bssSlope is equal to the value of the “Request for DLBNR4 report field”, e.g., in unsigned integer format, and whose bssSectorType is equal to mod(ulUltraslotBeaconslotIndex,3), where ulUltraslotBeaconslotIndex is the uplink index of the beaconslot within the ultraslot of the current connection. In some exemplary embodiments, there are 18 indexed beaconslots within an ultraslot.

In various embodiments, both the generic and the special beacon ratios are determined from the calculated channel gain ratios G1, G2, . . . , as follows. The WT receives an uplink loading factor sent in a downlink broadcast system subchannel and determines a variable b₀ from uplink loading factor table 2800 of FIG. 28. Table 2800 includes a first column 2802 listing eight different values that may be used for the uplink loading factor (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7); second column lists the corresponding values for the b value in dB (0, −1, −2, −3, −4, −6, −9, −infinity), respectively. For other BSSi, the WT attempts to receive b_(i) from the uplink loading factor sent in the downlink broadcast system subchannel of the BSS i in the tone block of the current connection. If the WT is unable to receive the UL loading factor bi, the WT sets b_(i)=1.

In some embodiments, in the single carrier operation, the WT calculates the following power ratio as the generic beacon ratio report: b₀/(G_(i)b₁+G₂b₂+ . . . ) when ulUltraslotBeaconslot Index is even or b0/max(G₁b₁, G₂b₂, . . . ) when ulUltraslotBeaconslotIndex is odd, where ulUltraslotBeaconslotIndex is the uplink index of the beaconslot within the ultraslot of the current connection and the operation+represents a regular addition. When required to send a specific beacon ratio report, the WT, in some embodiments, calculates b₀/(G_(k)B_(k)), where index k represents the specific BSS k. In some embodiments, there are 18 indexed beaconslots within an ultraslot.

FIG. 29 is a table 2900 illustrating an exemplary format for a 4 bit downlink beacon ratio report (DLBNR4), in accordance with various embodiments. First column 2902 lists the 16 various bit patterns that the report can convey, while second column 2904 lists the reported power ratio reported corresponding to each bit pattern, e.g., ranging from −3 dB to 26 dBs. The wireless terminal reports the generic and specific beacon ratio reports by selecting and communicating the DLBNR4 table entry that is closed to the determined report value. Although in this exemplary embodiment, the generic and specific beacon ratio reports use the same table for DLBNR4, in some embodiments, different tables may be used.

An exemplary 4 bit saturation level of downlink self-noise SNR report (DLSSNR4) will now be described. In some embodiments, the WT derives the saturation level of the DL SNR, which is defined to be the DL SNR that the WT receiver would measure on a received signal if the BSS transmitted the signal at infinite power, if the base station were capable of transmitting such a signal and the wireless terminal was capable of measuring such a signal. The saturation level can be, and in some embodiments is, determined by the self-noise of the WT receiver, which may be caused by factor such as channel estimation errors. The following is an exemplary method to derive the saturation level of the DL SNR.

In the exemplary method, the WT assumes that if the BSS transmits at power P, the DL SNR is equal to SNR(P)=GP/(a₀GP+N), where G represent the wireless channel path gain from the BSS to the WT, P is the transmission power, so that GP is the received signal power, N represents the received interference power, a₀GP represents the self-noise, where a higher value of a₀ denotes a higher value of self-noise. G is a value between 0 and 1, a₀, P, and N are positive values. In this model, by definition, the saturation level of the DL SNR is equal to 1/a₀. In some embodiments, the WT measures the received power of a downlink Null channel (DL.NCH) to determine the interference power N, measures the received power (denoted as G*P₀) of the downlink pilot channel and SNR (denoted by SNR₀) of the downlink pilot channel; the WT then calculates 1/a₀=(1/SNR₀−N/(GP₀))⁻¹.

Once the WT has derived the saturation level of the DL SNR, the WT reports it by using the closest entry to the derived value in a DL self-noise saturation level report table. Table 3000 of FIG. 30 is such an exemplary table describing the format of DLSSNR4. First column 3002 indicates the 16 different possible bit patterns that can be conveyed by the DLSSNR4 report, and second column 3004 lists saturation levels of DL SNR that are communicated corresponding to each bit pattern ranging from 8.75 dB to 29.75 dBs.

In various embodiments, a flexible report is included in the DCCH, such that the WT decides which type of report to communicate and, the type of report can change from one flexible reporting opportunity to the next for a given WT using its allocated dedicated control channel segments.

In an exemplary embodiment, the WT uses a 2 bit type report (TYPE2) to indicate the type of report selected by the WT to be communicated in a 4 bit body report (BODY4) of the same DCCH segment including both the TYPE2 and BODY4 reports. Table 3100 of FIG. 31 is an example of mapping between TYPE2 report information bits and the type of report carried by the corresponding BODY4 report. First column 3102 indicates the four possible bit patterns for the 2 bit TYPE2 report. Second column 3104 indicates the type of report to be carried in the BODY4 report of the same uplink dedicated control channel segment corresponding to the TYPE2 report. Table 3100 indicates that: bit pattern 00 indicates that BODY4 report will be an ULRQST4 report, Bit pattern 01 indicates the BODY4 report will be a DLSSNR4 report, and bit patterns 10 and 11 are reserved.

In some embodiments, a WT selects the TYPE2 and BODY4 reports by assessing the relative importance of the different types of reports from among which the selection may occur, e.g., the reports listed in table 3100. In some embodiments, the WT can select the TYPE2 independently from one segment to another.

FIG. 32 is a drawing 3299 illustrating an exemplary default mode of the split tone format in a beaconslot for a given DCCH tone for a first WT. In FIG. 32, each block (3200, 3201, 3202, 3203 3204, 3205, 3206, 3207, 3208, 3209, 3210, 3211, 3212, 3213, 3214, 3215, 3216, 3217, 3218, 3219, 3220, 3221, 3222, 3223, 3224, 3225, 3226, 3227, 3228, 3229, 3230, 3231, 3232, 3323, 3234, 3235, 3236, 3237, 3238, 3239) represents one segment whose index s2 (0, . . . , 39) is shown above the block in rectangular region 3240. Each block, e.g., block 3200 representing segment 0, conveys 8 information bits; each block comprises 8 rows corresponding to the 8 bits in the segment, where the bits are listed from the most significant bit to the least significant bit downwards from the top row to the bottom row as shown in rectangular region 3243.

For an exemplary embodiment, the framing format shown in FIG. 32 is used repeatedly in every beaconslot, when the default mode of split-tone format is used, with the following exception. In the first uplink superslot after the wireless terminal migrates to the ON state in the current connection, the WT shall use the framing format shown in FIG. 33. The first uplink superslot is defined: for a scenario when the WT migrates to the ON state from the ACCESS state, for a scenario when the WT migrates to the ON state from a HOLD state, and for a scenario when the WT migrates to the ON state from the ON state of another connection.

FIG. 33 illustrates an exemplary definition of the default mode in the split-tone format of the uplink DCCH segments in the first uplink superslot after the WT migrates to the ON state. Drawing 3399 includes five successive segments (3300, 3301, 3302, 3303, 3304) corresponding to segment index numbers, s2=(0, 1, 2, 3, 4,), respectively in the superslot as indicated by rectangle 3306 above the segments. Each block, e.g., block 3300 representing segment 0 of the superslot, conveys 8 information bits; each block comprises 8 rows corresponding to the 8 bits in the segment, where the bits are listed from the most significant bit to the least significant bit downwards from the top row to the bottom row as shown in rectangular region 3308.

In the exemplary embodiment, in the scenario of migrating from the HOLD to ON state, the WT starts to transmit the uplink DCCH channel from the beginning of the first UL superslot, and therefore the first uplink DCCH segment shall transport the information bits in the leftmost information column of FIG. 33, the information bits of segment 3300. In the exemplary embodiment, in the scenario of migrating from the ACCESS state to the ON state, the WT does not necessarily start from the beginning of the first UL superslot, but does still transmit the uplink DCCH segments according to the framing format specified in FIG. 33. For example, if the WT starts to transmit the UL DCCH segments from the halfslot of the superslot with index=10, then the WT skips the leftmost information column of FIG. 33 (segment 3300) and the first uplink segment transported corresponds to segment 3303). Note that in the exemplary embodiment, superlsot indexed halfslots (1-3) correspond to one segment and superslot indexed halfslots (10-12) correspond to the next segment for the WT. In the exemplary embodiment, for the scenario of switching between the full-tone and split-tone formats, the WT uses the framing format shown in FIG. 32 without the above exception of using the format shown in FIG. 33.

Once, the first UL superslot ends, the uplink DCCH channel segments switch to the framing format of FIG. 32. Depending on where the first uplink superslot ends, the point of switching the framing format may or may not be the beginning of a beaconslot. Note that in this exemplary embodiment, there are five DCCH segments for a given DCCH tone for a superslot. For example, suppose that the first uplink superslot is of uplink beaconslot superslot index=2, where beaconslot superslot index range is from 0 to 7 (superslot 0, superlot 1, . . . , superslot 7). Subsequently in the next uplink superslot, which is of uplink beaconslot superslot index=3, the first uplink DCCH segment using the default framing format of FIG. 32 is of index s2=15 (segment 3215 of FIG. 32) and transports the information corresponding to segment s2=15 (segment 3215 of FIG. 32).

Each uplink DCCH segment is used to transmit a set of Dedicated Control Channel Reports (DCRs). An exemplary summary list of DCRs in the split-tone format for the default mode is given in table 3400 FIG. 34. The information of table 3400 is applicable to the partitioned segments of FIGS. 32 and 33. Each segment of FIGS. 32 and 33 includes two or more reports as described in table 3400. First column 3402 of table 3400 describes abbreviated names used for each exemplary report. The name of each report ends with a number which specifies the number of bits of the DCR. Second column 3404 of table 3400 briefly describes each named report. Third column 3406 specifies the segment index s2 of FIG. 32, in which a DCR is to be transmitted, and corresponds to a mapping between table 3400 and FIG. 32.

It should be noted that FIGS. 32, 33 and 34 describe the segments (indexed segments 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, and 36) corresponding to a first WT in split tone format for default mode. With respect to FIG. 32, a second wireless terminal that use the split tone format of default mode on the same logical tone in the DCCH will follow the same report pattern but the segments will be shifted by one, thus the second WT uses indexed segments (1, 4, 7, 10, 13, 16, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, and 37). With respect to FIG. 33, a second wireless terminal that use the split tone format of default mode on the same logical tone in the DCCH will follow the same report pattern but the segments will be shifted by one, thus the second WT uses indexed segments 3301 and 3304. With respect to FIG. 32, a third wireless terminal that use the split tone format of default mode on the same logical tone in the DCCH will follow the same report pattern but the segments will be shifted by two, thus the third WT uses indexed segments (2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 33, 35, and 38). With respect to FIG. 33, a third wireless terminal that use the split tone format of default mode on the same logical tone in the DCCH will follow the same report pattern but the segments will be shifted by two, thus the third WT uses indexed segments 3305. In FIG. 32, segment with index=39 is reserved.

FIG. 33 provides a representation corresponding to the replacement of the first superslot of a beaconslot corresponding to table 3299, e.g., segment 3300 replaces segment 3200 and/or segment 3303 replaces segment 3203. In FIG. 32, for each superslot, one or two segments are allocated to an exemplary wireless terminal using split-tone DCCH format, and the location of the allocated segments varies depending on the superslot of the beaconslot. For example, in the first superslot, two segments (3200, 3203) are allocated corresponding to the first and fourth DCCH segments of the superslots; in the second superslot, two segments (3206, 3209) are allocated corresponding to the 2^(nd) and 5th DCCH segments of the superslot; in the third superslot, one segment 3213 is allocated corresponding to the third DCCH segment of the superslot. In some embodiments, segment 3300, when used, is used to replace the first scheduled DCCH segment of a superslot and segment 3303, when used, is used to replace the second scheduled DCCH segment of a superslot. For example, segment 3300 may replace segment 3206 and/or segment 3303 may replace segment 3309. As another example, segment 3300 may replace segment 3212.

In some embodiments, the 5 bit absolute report of DL SNR (DLSNR5) follows the same format in split-tone format default mode as used in the full-tone format default mode. In some such embodiments, there is an exception such that the default value of NumConsecutivePreferred is different in the split-tone format than in the full-tone format, e.g., 6 in the split tone format default mode vs 10 in the full tone format default mode.

In some embodiments, the 3 bit DLDSNR3 report follows the same format in the split-tone format default mode as used in the full-tone format default mode. In some embodiments, the 4 bit DLSSNR4 report follows the same format in the split-tone format default mode as used in the full-tone format default mode.

In some embodiments, the 4 bit uplink transmission backoff report (ULTxBKF4) of the split tone format default mode is generated similarly to the ULTxBKF5 of full tone format default mode, except table 3500 of FIG. 35 is used for the report.

FIG. 35 is a table 3500 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for an exemplary 4 bit uplink transmission backoff report (ULTxBKF4), in accordance with various embodiments. First column 3502 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 3504 identifies the reported WT uplink DCCH Backoff report values in dBs corresponding to each bit pattern each bit pattern. In this exemplary embodiment 16 distinct levels can be reported ranging from 6 dB to 36 dBs. A wireless terminal calculates wtULDCCHBackoff, e.g., as indicated above, selects the closest entry in table 3500 and uses that bit pattern for the report.

In some embodiments, the 4 bit DLBNR4 report follows the same format in the split-tone format default mode as used in the full-tone format default mode. In some embodiments, the 3 bit ULRQST3 report follows the same format in the split-tone format default mode as used in the full-tone format default mode. In some embodiments, the 4 bit ULRQST4 report follows the same format in the split-tone format default mode as used in the full-tone format default mode.

In various embodiments, a flexible report is included in the DCCH in the split-tone format in the default mode, such that the WT decides which type of report to communicate and, the type of report can change from one flexible reporting opportunity to the next for a given WT using its allocated dedicated control channel segments.

In an exemplary embodiment, the WT uses a 1 bit type report (TYPE1) to indicate the type of report selected by the WT to be communicated in a 4 bit body report (BODY4) of the same DCCH segment including both the TYPE1 and BODY4 reports. Table 3600 of FIG. 36 is an example of mapping between TYPE1 report information bits and the type of report carried by the corresponding BODY4 report. First column 3602 indicates the two possible bit patterns for the 1 bit TYPE1 report. Second column 3604 indicates the type of report to be carried in the BODY4 report of the same uplink dedicated control channel segment corresponding to the TYPE1 report. Table 3600 indicates that: bit pattern 0 indicates that BODY4 report will be an ULRQST4 report, Bit pattern 01 indicates the BODY4 report will be a Reserved report.

In some embodiments, a WT selects the TYPE1 and BODY4 reports by assessing the relative importance if the different types of reports from among which the selection may occur, e.g., the reports listed in table 3600. In some embodiments, the WT can select the TYPE1 independently from one segment to another.

In some embodiments, the encoding and modulation scheme used when the uplink dedicated control channel segment uses the full-tone format is different than the encoding and modulation scheme used when the uplink dedicated control channel segment uses the split-tone format.

An exemplary first method used for encoding and modulation when the dedicated control channel segment uses the full-tone format will now be described. Let b₅, b₄, b₃, b₂, b₁, and b₀ denote the information bits to be transmitted in the uplink dedicated control channel segment, where b₅ is the most significant bit and b₀ is the least significant bit. Define c₂c₁c₀=(b₅b₄b₃).̂(b₂b₁b₀), where .̂ is a bit-wise logical OR operation. The WT determines a group of seven modulation-symbols from information bit groups b₅b₄b₃ according to Table 3700 of FIG. 37. Table 3700 is an exemplary specification of uplink dedicated control channel segment modulation coding in full-tone format. First column 3702 of table 3700 includes bit patterns for 3 ordered information bits; second column 3704 includes corresponding sets of seven ordered coded modulation symbols, each set corresponding to a different possible bit pattern.

The seven modulation-symbols determined from b₅b₄b₃ are to be the seven most significant coded modulation-symbols of the output of the coding and modulation operation.

The WT determines a group of seven modulation-symbols from information bit groups b₂b₁b₀ similarly using table 3700, and uses the seven modulation-symbols obtained as the next most significant coded modulation-symbols of the output of the encoding and modulation operation.

The WT determines a group of seven modulation-symbols from information bit groups c₂c₁c₀ similarly using table 3700, and use the seven modulation-symbols obtained as the least significant coded modulation-symbols of the output of the coding and modulation operation.

An exemplary second method used for encoding and modulation when the dedicated control channel segment uses the split-tone format will now be described. Let b₇, b₆, b₅, b₄, b₃, b₂, b₁, and b₀ denote the information bits to be transmitted in the uplink dedicated control channel segment, where b7 is the most significant bit and b₀ is the least significant bit. Define c₃c₂c₁c₀=(b₇b₆b₅b₄).̂(b₃b₂b₁b₀), where .̂ is a bit-wise logical OR operation. The WT determines a group of seven modulation-symbols from information bit groups b₇b₆b₅b₄ according to Table 3800 of FIG. 38. Table 3800 is an exemplary specification of uplink dedicated control channel segment modulation coding in split-tone format. First column 3802 of table 3800 includes bit patterns for 4 ordered information bits; second column 3804 includes corresponding sets of seven ordered coded modulation symbols, each set corresponding to a different possible bit pattern.

The seven modulation-symbols determined from b₇b₆b₅b₄ are to be the seven most significant coded modulation-symbols of the output of the coding and modulation operation.

The WT determines a group of seven modulation-symbols from information bit groups b₃b₂b₁b₀ similarly using table 3800, and uses the seven modulation-symbols obtained as the next most significant coded modulation-symbols of the output of the encoding and modulation operation.

The WT determines a group of seven modulation-symbols from information bit groups c₃c₂c₁c₀ similarly using table 3800, and uses the seven modulation-symbols obtained as the least significant coded modulation-symbols of the output of the coding and modulation operation.

FIG. 39 is a drawing of a table 3900 illustrating exemplary wireless terminal uplink traffic channel frame request group queue count information. Each wireless terminal maintains and updates its request group count information. In this exemplary embodiment there are four request groups (RG0, RG1, RG2, RG3). Other embodiments may use different numbers of request groups. In some embodiments, different WTs in the system may have different numbers of request groups. First column 3902 lists queue element index and second column 3904 lists queue element value. First row 3906 indicates that N[0]=the number of MAC frames that the WT intends to transmit for request group 0 (RG0); second row 3908 indicates that N[1]=the number of MAC frames that the WT intends to transmit for request group 1 (RG1); third row indicates that N[2]=the number of MAC frames that the WT intends to transmit for request group 2; fourth row 3912 indicates that N[3]=the number of MAC frames that the WT intends to transmit for request group 3.

Drawing 4000 of FIG. 40 includes an exemplary set of four request group queues (4002, 4004, 4006, 4008) being maintained by a wireless terminal, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment. Queue 0 4002 is the queue for request group 0 information. Queue 0 information 4002 includes a count of the total number of frames, e.g., MAC frames, of queue 0 traffic (N[0]) that the WT intends to transmit 4010 and the corresponding frames of uplink traffic (frame 1 4012, frame 2, 4014, frame 3 4016, . . . , frame N₀ 4018). Queue 1 4004 is the queue for request group 1 information. Queue 1 information 4004 includes a count of the total number of frames, e.g., MAC frames, of queue 1 traffic (N[1]) that the WT intends to transmit 4020 and the corresponding frames of uplink traffic (frame 1 4022, frame 2, 4024, frame 3 4026, . . . , frame N₁ 4028). Queue 2 4006 is the queue for request group 2 information. Queue 2 information 4006 includes a count of the total number of frames, e.g., MAC frames, of queue 2 traffic (N[2]) that the WT intends to transmit 4030 and the corresponding frames of uplink traffic (frame 1 4032, frame 2, 4034, frame 3 4036, . . . , frame N₂ 4038). Queue 3 4008 is the queue for request group 3 information. Queue 3 information 4008 includes a count of the total number of frames, e.g., MAC frames, of queue 3 traffic (N[3]) that the WT intends to transmit 4040 and the corresponding frames of uplink traffic (frame 1 4042, frame 2, 4044, frame 3 4046, . . . , frame N₃ 4048). In some embodiments, the request queues, for at least some wireless terminals, are priority queues. For example, in some embodiments, request group 0 queue 4002 is used for the highest priority traffic, request group 1 queue 4004 is used for the 2^(nd) highest priority traffic, request group 2 queue 4006 is used for the third highest priority traffic, and request group 3 queue 4008 is used for the lowest priority traffic, from the perspective of the individual wireless terminal.

In some embodiments, the traffic in at least some request queues during at least some times for at least some wireless terminals have different priorities. In some embodiments, priority is one factor considered when mapping a traffic flow to a request queue. In some embodiments, priority is one factor considered when scheduling/transmitting traffic. In some embodiments, priority is representative of relative importance. In some embodiments, all other factors being equal, traffic belonging to a higher priority is scheduled/transmitted more often than traffic belonging to lower priorities.

Drawing 4052 of FIG. 40 illustrates exemplary mapping for a first WT, WT A, of uplink data stream traffic flows to its request group queues. First column 4054 includes information type of the data stream traffic flow; second column 4056 includes the identified queue (request group); third column 4058 includes comments. First row 4060 indicates that control information is mapped to request group 0 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 0 queue are considered high priority, have strict latency requirements, require low latency and/or have low bandwidth requirements. Second row 4062 indicates that voice information is mapped to request group 1 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 1 queue also require low latency but have a lower priority level than request group 0. Third row 4064 indicates that gaming and audio stream application A is mapped to request group 2 queue. For flows mapped to the request group 2, latency is somewhat important and the bandwidth requirements are slightly higher than for voice. Fourth row 4066 indicates that FTP, web browsing, and video stream application A are mapped to request group 3 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 3, are delay insensitive and/or require high bandwidth.

Drawing 4072 of FIG. 40 illustrates exemplary mapping for a second WT, WTB, of uplink data stream traffic flows to its request group queues. First column 4074 includes information type of the data stream traffic flow; second column 4076 includes the identified queue (request group); third column 4078 includes comments. First row 4080 indicates that control information is mapped to request group 0 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 0 queue are considered high priority, have strict latency requirements, require low latency and/or have low bandwidth requirements. Second row 4082 indicates that voice and audio stream application A information are mapped to request group 1 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 1 queue also require low latency but have a lower priority level than request group 0. Third row 4084 indicates that gaming and audio stream application B, and image stream application A are mapped to request group 2 queue. For flows mapped to the request group 2, latency is somewhat important and the bandwidth requirements are slightly higher than for voice. Fourth row 4086 indicates that FTP, web browsing, and image stream application B are mapped to request group 3 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 3, are delay insensitive and/or require high bandwidth.

It should be noted the WT A and WT B use different mapping from their uplink data stream traffic flows to their set of request group queues. For example audio stream application A is mapped to request group queue 2 for WTA, while the same audio stream application A is mapped to request group queue 1 for WTB. In addition, different WTs may have different types of uplink data stream traffic flows. For example, WT B includes an audio stream application B that is not included for WT A. This approach, in accordance with various embodiments, allows each WT to customize and/or optimize its request queue mapping to match the different types of data being communicated via its uplink traffic channel segments. For example, a mobile node such as a voice and text message cell phone has different types of data streams than a mobile data terminal used primarily for on-line gaming and web browsing, and would typically have a different mapping of data streams to request group queues.

In some embodiments, the mapping from uplink data stream traffic flows to request group queues for a WT may change with time. Drawing 4001 of FIG. 40A illustrates exemplary mapping for a WT C at a first time T1, of uplink data stream traffic flows to its request group queues. First column 4003 includes information type of the data stream traffic flow; second column 4005 includes the identified queue (request group); third column 4007 includes comments. First row 4009 indicates that control information is mapped to request group 0 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 0 queue are considered high priority, have strict latency requirements, require low latency and/or have low bandwidth requirements. Second row 4011 indicates that voice information is mapped to request group 1 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 1 queue also require low latency but have a lower priority level than request group 0. Third row 4013 indicates that gaming and audio stream application A is mapped to request group 2 queue. For flows mapped to the request group 2, latency is somewhat important and the bandwidth requirements are slightly higher than for voice. Fourth row 4015 indicates that FTP, web browsing, and video stream application A are mapped to request group 3 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 3, are delay insensitive and/or require high bandwidth.

Drawing 4017 of FIG. 40A illustrates exemplary mapping for a WT C at a second time T2, of uplink data stream traffic flows to its request group queues. First column 4019 includes information type of the data stream traffic flow; second column 4021 includes the identified queue (request group); third column 4023 includes comments. First row 4025 indicates that control information is mapped to request group 0 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 0 queue are considered high priority, have strict latency requirements, require low latency and/or have low bandwidth requirements. Second row 4027 indicates that voice application and a gaming application is mapped to request group 1 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 1 queue also require low latency but have a lower priority level than request group 0. Third row 4029 indicates that video streaming application A is mapped to request group 2 queue. For flows mapped to the request group 2, latency is somewhat important and the bandwidth requirements are slightly higher than for voice. Fourth row 4031 indicates that FTP, web browsing and video streaming application B are mapped to request group 3 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 3, are delay insensitive and/or require high bandwidth.

Drawing 4033 of FIG. 73 illustrates exemplary mapping for a WT C at a third time T3, of uplink data stream traffic flows to its request group queues. First column 4035 includes information type of the data stream traffic flow; second column 4037 includes the identified queue (request group); third column 4039 includes comments. First row 4041 indicates that control information is mapped to request group 0 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 0 queue are considered high priority, have strict latency requirements, require low latency and/or have low bandwidth requirements. Second row 4043 and third row 4045 indicate that no data traffic applications are mapped to request group 1 and request group 2 queues, respectively. Fourth row 4047 indicates that FTP and web browsing are mapped to request group 3 queue. Flows mapped to the request group 3, are delay insensitive and/or require high bandwidth.

It should be noted WT C uses different mappings from their uplink data stream traffic flows to their set of request group queues at the three times T1, T2 and T3. For example audio stream application A is mapped to request group queue 2 at time T1, while the same audio stream application A is mapped to request group queue 1 at time T2. In addition, the WT may have different types of uplink data stream traffic flows at different times. For example, at time T2, the WT includes a video stream application B that is not included at time T1. In addition, the WT may have no uplink data stream traffic flows mapped to a specific request group queue at a given time. For example, at time T3, there are no uplink data stream traffic flows that are mapped to request group queues 1 and 2. This approach, in accordance with various embodiments, allows each WT to customize and/or optimize its request queue mapping to match the different types of data being communicated via its uplink traffic channel segments at any time.

FIG. 41 illustrates an exemplary request group queue structure, multiple request dictionaries, a plurality of types of uplink traffic channel request reports, and grouping of sets of queues in accordance with exemplary formats used for each of the types of reports. In this exemplary embodiment, there are four request group queues for a given wireless terminal. The exemplary structure accommodates four request dictionaries. The exemplary structure uses three types of uplink traffic channel request reports (a 1 bit report, a 3-bit report, and a 4-bit report).

FIG. 41 includes: exemplary queue 0 (request group 0) information 4102 which includes the total number of frames, e.g., MAC frames, of queue 0 traffic that an exemplary WT intends to transmit (N[0]) 4110, exemplary queue 1 (request group 1) information 4104 which includes the total number of frames, e.g., MAC frames, of queue 1 traffic that an exemplary WT intends to transmit (N[1]) 4112, exemplary queue 2 (request group 2) information 4106 which includes the total number of frames, e.g., MAC frames, of queue 2 traffic that an exemplary WT intends to transmit (N[2]) 4114, and exemplary queue 3 (request group 3) information 4108 which includes the total number of frames, e.g., MAC frames, of queue 3 traffic that an exemplary WT intends to transmit (N[3]) 4116. The set of queue 0 info 4102, queue 1 info 4104, queue 2 info 4106 and queue 3 info 4108 correspond to one WT in the system. Each WT in the system maintains its set of queues, tracking uplink traffic frames that it may intend to transmit.

Table 4118 identifies grouping of queue sets used by different types of request reports as a function of the dictionary in use. Column 4120 identifies the dictionary. The first type of exemplary report is, e.g., a 1 bit information report. Column 4122 identifies the first set of queues used for first type reports. The first set of queues is the set {queue 0 and queue 1} for the first type of report irrespective of the request dictionary. Column 4124 identifies the second set of queues used for second type reports. The second set of queues is the set {queue 0} for the second type of report irrespective of the request dictionary. Column 4126 identifies the third set of queues used for second type reports. The third set of queues is: (i) the set {queue 1, queue 2, queue 3} for the second type of report for request dictionary 0, (ii) the set of {queue 2} for the second type of report for request dictionary 1, and (iii) the set of {queue 1} for the second type of report for dictionary 2 and 3. The third type of report uses a fourth and fifth set of queues for each dictionary. The third type of report uses a sixth set of queues for dictionaries 1, 2, and 3. The third type of report uses a seventh set of queues for dictionary 3. Column 4128 identifies that the fourth set of queues for the third type of report is the set {queue 0} irrespective of the dictionary. Column 4130 identifies that the fifth set of queues for the third type of report is the set {queue 1, queue 2, queue 3} for dictionary 0, the set {queue 2} for dictionary 1, the set {queue 1} for dictionaries 2 and 3. Column 4132 identifies that the sixth set of queues for the third type of report is the set {queue 1, queue 3} for dictionary 1, the set {queue 2, queue 3} for dictionary 2, and the set {queue 2} for dictionary 3. Column 4134 identifies that the seventh set of queues for the third type of report is the set {queue 3} for dictionary 3.

As an example, the (first, second, and third) types of reports may be the exemplary (ULRQST1, ULRQST3, and ULRQST4) reports, respectively, of FIGS. 16-25. The sets of queues used (See table 4118) will be described with respect to the dictionary 0 for the exemplary ULRQST1, ULRQST3, and ULRQST 4. First set of queues {queue 0, queue 1} corresponds to ULRQST1 using N[0]+N[1] in table 1600, e.g., an ULRQST1=1 indicates that N[0]+N[1]>0. Queue stats of second set of queues {queue 0} and third set of queues {queue 1, queue 2, queue 3} are jointly coded in an ULRQST3. Second set of queues {queue 0} corresponds to an ULRQST3 which uses N[0] as the first jointly coded element in table 1900, e.g., an ULRQST3=001 indicates N[0]=0. Third set of queues {queue 1, queue 2, queue 3} corresponds to an ULRQST3 which uses (N[1]+N[2]+N[3]) as the second jointly coded element in table 1900, e.g., an ULRQST3=001 indicates ceil((N[1]+N[2]+N[3])/y)=1. Queue stats of fourth set of queues {queue 0} or the fifth set of queues {queue 1, queue 2, queue 3} are coded in an ULRQST4. The fourth set of queues corresponds to ULRQST4 using N[0] in table 1800, e.g., an ULRQST4=0010 indicates that N[0]>=4. The fifth set of queues corresponds to ULRQST4 using N[1]+N[2]+N[3] in table 1800, e.g., an ULRQST4=0011 indicates ceil((N[1]+N[2]+N[3])/y)=1.

In the exemplary embodiment where (first type, second, and third) types of reports are the exemplary (ULRQST1, ULRQST3, and ULRQST4) reports of FIGS. 16-25, the first type of report is independent of request dictionary and uses the first set of queues of table 4118, a second type of report communicates queue stat information about both a second set of queues and a corresponding third set of queues from table 4118, and a third type of report communicates queue stat information about one of: a fourth sets of queues, a corresponding fifth set of queues, a corresponding sixth set of queues, and a corresponding seventh set of queues.

FIG. 42, comprising the combination of FIG. 42A, FIG. 42B, FIG. 42C, FIG. 42D, and FIG. 42E is a flowchart 4200 of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal in accordance with various embodiments. Operation of the exemplary method starts in step 4202, where the WT is powered on and initialized. Queue definition information 4204, e.g., mapping information defining mapping of traffic flows from various applications into MAC frames of specific request group queues and various grouping of request groups into sets of request groups, and sets of request dictionary information 4206 are available for use by the wireless terminal. For example, the information 4204 and 4206 may be pre-stored in the wireless terminal in non-volatile memory. In some embodiments, a default request dictionary from among the plurality of available request dictionaries is used by the wireless terminal initially, e.g., request dictionary 0. Operation proceeds from start step 4202 to steps 4208, 4210 and 4212.

In step 4208 the wireless terminal maintains transmission queue stats for a plurality of queues, e.g., request group 0 queue, request group 1 queue, request group 2 queue and request group 3 queue. Step 4208 includes sub-step 4214 and sub-step 4216. In sub-step 4214, the wireless terminal increments queue stats when data to be transmitted is added to a queue. For example, new packets from an uplink data stream flow, e.g., a voice communications session flow, are mapped as MAC frames to one of the request groups, e.g., request group 1 queue and a queue stat, e.g., N[1] representing the total number of request group 1 frames that the WT intends to transmit is updated. In some embodiments, different wireless terminals use different mappings. In sub-step 4216, the WT decrements the queue stats when data to be transmitted is removed from a queue. For example, the data to be transmitted may be removed from the queue because the data has been transmitted, the data has been transmitted and a positive acknowledgement was received, the data no longer needs to be transmitted because a data validity timer has expired, or the data no longer needs to be transmitted because the communications session has been terminated.

In step 4210, the wireless terminal generates transmission power availability information. For example, the wireless terminal calculates the wireless terminal transmission backoff power, determines a wireless terminal transmission backoff power report value, and stores backoff power information. Step 4210 is performed on an ongoing basis with the stored information being updated, e.g., in accordance with a DCCH structure.

In step 4212, the wireless terminal generates transmission path loss information for at least two physical attachment points. For example, the wireless terminal measures received pilot and/or beacon signals from at least two physical attachment points calculates a ratio value, determines a beacon ratio report value, e.g., corresponding to a generic beacon ratio report of a first or second type or a specific beacon ratio report, and stores the beacon ratio report information. Step 4212 is performed on an ongoing basis with the stored information being updated, e.g. in accordance with a DCCH structure.

In addition to performing step 4208, 4210 and 4212, the WT, for each reporting opportunity in a (first, second, third) set of predetermined transmission queue stats reporting opportunities operation goes to (sub-routine 1 4224, sub-routine 2 4238, subroutine 3 4256), via (step 4218, step 4220, step 4222), respectively. For example, each first set of predetermined transmission queue stat reporting opportunities corresponds to each one-bit uplink traffic channel request reporting opportunity in the timing structure. For example, if a WT is communicating over DCCH segments using the full-tone DCCH format default mode, e.g., of FIG. 10, the WT receives 16 opportunities to send ULRQST1 in a beaconslot. Continuing with the example, each second set of predetermined transmission queue stat reporting opportunities corresponds to each three-bit uplink traffic channel request reporting opportunity in the timing structure. For example, if a WT is communicating over DCCH segments using the full-tone DCCH format default mode, e.g., of FIG. 10, the WT receives 12 opportunities to send ULRQST3 in a beaconslot. If a WT is communicating over DCCH segments using the split-tone DCCH format default mode, e.g., of FIG. 32, the WT receives 6 opportunities to send ULRQST3 in a beaconslot. Continuing with the example, each third set of predetermined transmission queue stat reporting opportunities corresponds to each four-bit uplink traffic channel request reporting opportunity in the timing structure. For example, if a WT is communicating over DCCH segments using the full-tone DCCH format default mode, e.g., of FIG. 10, the WT receives 9 opportunities to send ULRQST4 in a beaconslot. If a WT is communicating over DCCH segments using the split-tone DCCH format default mode, e.g., of FIG. 32, the WT receives 6 opportunities to send ULRQST4 in a beaconslot. For each flexible report in which the WT decides to send an ULRQST4, operation also goes to sub-routine 4256 via connecting node 4222.

Exemplary traffic availability subroutine 1 4224 will now be described. Operation starts in step 4226, and the WT receives backlog information for a first set of queues, e.g. the set of {Queue 0, Queue 1} where the information received is N[0]+N[1]. Operation proceeds from step 4226 to step 4230.

In step 4230, the WT checks if there is a backlog of traffic in the first set of queues. If there is no backlog in the first set of queues, N[0]+N[1]=0, then operation proceeds from step 4230 to step 4234, where the WT transmits a first number of information bits, e.g., 1 information bit, indicating no traffic backlog in the first set of queues, e.g. the information bit is set equal to 0. Alternatively, if there is a backlog in the first set of queues, N[0]+N[1]>0, then operation proceeds from step 4230 to step 4232, where the WT transmits a first number of information bits, e.g., 1 information bit, indicating a traffic backlog in the first set of queues, e.g. the information bit is set equal to 1. Operation proceeds from either step 4232 or step 4234 to return step 4236.

Exemplary traffic availability subroutine 2 4238 will now be described. Operation starts in step 4240, and the WT receives backlog information for a second set of queues, e.g. the set of {Queue 0} where the information received is N[0]. In step 4240, the WT also receives backlog information for a third set of queues, e.g., the set {queue 1, queue2, queue3} or {queue 2} or {queue 1} depending on the request dictionary in use by the WT. For example, corresponding to dictionary (1, 2, 3, 4), the WT may receive (N[1]+N[2]+N[3], N[2], N[1], N[1]), respectively. Operation proceeds from step 4240 to step 4246.

In step 4246, the WT jointly encodes the backlog information corresponding to the second and third sets of queues into a second predetermined number of information bits, e.g., 3, said joint encoding optionally including quantization. In some embodiments, for at least some request dictionaries sub-step 4248 and sub-step 4250 are performed as part of step 4246. In some embodiments, for at least some request dictionaries for at least some iterations of step 4246, sub-step 4248 and sub-step 4250 are performed as part of step 4246. Sub-step 4248 directs operation to a quantization level control factor subroutine. Sub-step 4250 calculates a quantization level as a function of a determined control factor. For example, consider exemplary ULRQST3 using default request dictionary 0 as shown in FIG. 19. In that exemplary case each of the quantization levels are calculated as a function of control factor y. In such an exemplary embodiment, sub-steps 4248 and 4250 are performed in determining the information bit pattern to place in the ULRQST3 report. Alternatively, consider exemplary ULRQST3 using request dictionary 1 as shown in FIG. 21. In that case, none of the quantization levels are calculated as a function of a control factor, e.g. y or z, and therefore sub-step 4248 and 4250 are not performed.

Operation proceeds from step 4246 to step 4252, where the WT transmits the jointly coded backlog information for the second and third sets of queues using the second predetermined number of information bits, e.g., 3 information bits. Operation proceeds from step 4252 to return step 4254.

Exemplary traffic availability subroutine 3 4256 will now be described. Operation starts in step 4258, and the WT receives backlog information for a fourth set of queues, e.g. the set of {Queue 0} where the information received is N[0]. In step 4240, the WT also receives backlog information for a fifth set of queues, e.g., the set {queue 1, queue2, queue3} or {queue 2} or {queue 1} depending on the request dictionary in use by the WT. For example, corresponding to dictionary (0, 1, 2, 3), the WT may receive (N[1]+N[2]+N[3], N[2], N[1], N[1]), respectively. In step 4240, the WT may also receives backlog information for a sixth set of queues, e.g., the set {queue 1, queue3} or {queue 2, queue3} or {queue 2} depending on the request dictionary in use by the WT. For example, corresponding to dictionary (1, 2, 3), the WT may receive (N[1]+N[3], N[2]+N[3], N[2]), respectively. In step 4240, the WT may also receive backlog information for a seventh set of queues, e.g., the set {queue 3} if request dictionary 3 is in use by the WT. Operation proceeds from step 4258 to step 4266.

In step 4268, the WT encodes the backlog information corresponding to one of the fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh sets of queues into a third predetermined number of information bits, e.g., 4, said encoding optionally including quantization. In some embodiments, for at least some request dictionaries sub-step 4270 and sub-step 4272 are performed as part of step 4268. In some embodiments, for at least some request dictionaries for at least some iterations of step 4268, sub-step 4270 and sub-step 4272 are performed as part of step 4268. Sub-step 4270 directs operation to a quantization level control factor subroutine. Sub-step 4272 calculates a quantization level as a function of a determined control factor.

Operation proceeds from step 4268 to step 4274, where the WT transmits the coded backlog information for one of the fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh sets of queues using the third predetermined number of information bits, e.g., 4 information bits. Operation proceeds from step 4274 to return step 4276.

Exemplary quantization level control factor subroutine 4278 will now be described. In some embodiments, the exemplary quantization level control factor subroutine 4278 implementation includes the use of table 1700 of FIG. 17. First column 1702 lists a condition; second column 1704 lists the corresponding value of output control parameter y; third column 1706 lists the corresponding value of output control parameter Z. Operation starts in step 4279, and the subroutine receives power information 4280, e.g., the last DCCH transmitter power backoff report, and path loss information 4282, e.g., the last reported beacon ratio report. Operation proceeds from step 4279 to step 4284, where the WT checks as to whether or not the power information and path loss information satisfy a first criteria. For example, the first criteria is in an exemplary embodiment: (x>28) AND (b>=9), where x is the value in dBs of the most recent uplink transmission power backoff report, e.g., ULTxBKF5 and b is the value in dBs of the most recent downlink beacon ratio report, e.g., DLBNR4. If the first criteria is satisfied, then operation proceeds from step 4284 to step 4286; however if the first criteria is not satisfied, operation proceeds to step 4288.

In step 4286, the wireless terminal sets control factors, e.g. the set {Y, Z}, to a first predetermined set of values, e.g., Y=Y1, Z=Z1, where Y1 and Z1 are positive integers. In one exemplary embodiment, Y1=2 and Z1=10.

Returning to step 4288, in step 4288 the WT checks as to whether or not the power information and path loss information satisfy a second criteria. For example in an exemplary embodiment, the second criteria is (x>27) AND (b>=8). If the second criteria is satisfied, then operation proceeds from step 4288 to step 4290, where the wireless terminal sets control factors, e.g. the set {Y, Z}, to a second predetermined set of values, e.g., Y=Y2, Z=Z2, where Y2 and Z2 are positive integers. In one exemplary embodiment, Y2=2 and Z2=9. If the second criteria is not satisfied operation proceeds to another criteria checking step where, depending on whether or not the criteria is satisfied, the control factor are set to predetermined values or testing is continued.

There are a fixed number of test criteria, utilized in the quantization level control factor subroutine. If none of the first N-1 test criteria are satisfied, operation proceeds to step 4292, where the wireless terminal tests as to whether or not the power information and path loss information satisfy an Nth criteria. For example in an exemplary embodiment where N=9, the Nth criteria is (x>12) and (b<−5). If the Nth criteria is satisfied, then operation proceeds from step 4292 to step 4294, where the wireless terminal sets control factors, e.g. the set {Y, Z}, to a Nth predetermined set of values, e.g., Y=YN, Z=ZN, where YN and ZN are positive integers. In one exemplary embodiment, YN=1 and ZN=2. If the Nth criteria is not satisfied, the wireless terminal sets control factors, e.g., the set {Y, Z} to a (N+1)th predetermined set of values, e.g., a default set Y=YD, Z=ZD, where YD and ZD are positive integers. In one exemplary embodiment, YD=1 and ZD=1.

Operation proceeds from step 4286, step 4290, other control factor setting steps, step 4294 or step 4296 to step 4298. In step 4298, the WT returns at least one control factor value, e.g., Y and/or Z.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart 4300 of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal in accordance with various embodiments. Operation starts in step 4302, where the wireless terminal is powered on, initialized, has established a connection with a base station. Operation proceeds from start step 4302 to step 4304.

In step 4304, the wireless terminal determines whether the WT is operating in a full-tone format DCCH mode or a split-tone format DCCH mode. For each DCCH segment allocated to the WT in full-tone format DCCH mode, the WT proceeds from step 4304 to step 4306. For each DCCH segment allocated to the WT in split-tone format DCCH mode, the WT proceeds from step 4304 to step 4308.

In step 4306, the WT determines a set of 21 coded modulation-symbol values from 6 information bits (b5, b4, b3, b2, b1, b0). Step 4306 includes sub-steps 4312, 4314, 4316, and 4318. In sub-step 4312, the WT determines 3 additional bits (c2, c1, c0) as a function of the 6 information bits. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, c2c1c0=(b5b4b3).̂(b2b1b0) where .̂ is a bit wise exclusive OR operation. Operation proceeds from step 4312 to step 4314. In sub-step 4314, the WT determines the seven most-significant modulation symbols using a first mapping function and 3 bits (b5, b4, b3) as input. Operation proceeds from sub-step 4314 to sub-step 4316. In sub-step 4316, the WT determines the seven next most significant modulation symbols using the first mapping function and 3 bits (b2, b1, b0) as input. Operation proceeds from sub-step 4316 to sub-step 4318. In sub-step 4318, the WT determines the seven least-significant modulation symbol using the first mapping function and 3 bits (c2, c1, c0) as input.

In step 4308, the WT determines a set of 21 coded modulation-symbol values from 8 information bits (b7, b6, b5, b4, b3, b2, b1, b0). Step 4308 includes sub-steps 4320, 4322, 4324, and 4326. In sub-step 4320, the WT determines 4 additional bits (c3, c2, c1, c0) as a function of the 8 information bits. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, c3c2c1c0=(b7b6b5b4).̂(b3b2b1b0) where .̂ is a bit wise exclusive OR operation. Operation proceeds from step 4320 to step 4322. In sub-step 4322, the WT determines the seven most-significant modulation symbols using a second mapping function and 4 bits (b7, b6, b5, b4) as input. Operation proceeds from sub-step 4322 to sub-step 4324. In sub-step 4324, the WT determines the seven next most significant modulation symbols using the second mapping function and 4 bits (b3, b2, b1, b0) as input. Operation proceeds from sub-step 4324 to sub-step 4326. In sub-step 4326, the WT determines the seven least-significant modulation symbol using the second mapping function and 4 bits (c3, c2, c1, c0) as input.

For each DCCH segment allocated to the wireless terminal, operation proceeds from either step 4306 or step 4308 to step 4310. In step 4310, the wireless terminal transmits the twenty-one determined modulation symbols of the segment.

In some embodiments, each DCCH segment corresponds to 21 OFDM tone symbols each tone-symbol of the DCCH segment using the same single logical tone in the uplink timing and frequency structure. The logical tone may be hopped during a DCCH segment, e.g., the same logical tone may corresponds to three different physical tones in the uplink tone block being used for the connection, with each physical tone remaining the same for seven successive OFDM symbol transmission time periods.

In one exemplary embodiment, each segment corresponds to multiple DCCH reports. In one exemplary embodiment, the first mapping function is represented by table 3700 of FIG. 37, and the second mapping function is represented by table 3800 of FIG. 38.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart 4400 of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal to report control information in accordance with various embodiments. Operation starts in step 4402, where the wireless terminal is powered up and initialized. Operation proceeds from start step 4402 to step 4404. In step 4404, the WT checks as to whether or not one of the following has occurred: (i) a transition from a first mode of WT operation to a second mode of WT operation and (ii) a handoff operation from a first connection to a second connection while remaining in the second mode of operation. In some embodiments, the second mode of operation is an ON mode of operation and said first mode of operation is one of a hold mode of operation, a sleep mode of operation, and an ACCESS mode of operation. In some embodiments, during the ON mode of operation, the wireless terminal can transmit user data on an uplink and during the hold and sleep modes of operation the wireless terminal is precluded from transmitting user data on said uplink. If one of the conditions checked for in step 4404 has occurred, operation proceeds to step 4406; otherwise, operation proceeds back to step 4404 where the checks are again performed.

In step 4406, the WT transmits an initial control information report set, said transmission of the initial control information report set having a first duration equal to a first time period. In some embodiments, the initial control information report set can include one or a plurality of reports. Operation proceeds from step 4406 to step 4408. In step 4408, the WT checks as to whether or not the WT is in the 2^(nd) mode of operation. If the WT is in the second mode of operation, operation proceeds from step 4408 to step 4410; otherwise operation proceeds to step 4404.

In step 4410, the WT transmits a first additional control information report set, said transmission of the first additional control information report set for a period of time which is the same as first time period, the first additional control information report set being different than from said initial control information report set. In some embodiments, the initial control information report set is different from the first additional control information report set due to the initial and first additional control information report sets having different formats. In some embodiments, the initial control information report set includes at least one report that is not included in the first additional control information report set. In some such embodiments, the initial control information report set includes at least two reports that are not included in the first additional control information report set. In some embodiments, the at least one report that is not included in the first additional control information report set is one of an interference report and a wireless terminal transmission power availability report. Operation proceeds from step 4410 to step 4412. In step 4412, the WT checks as to whether or not the WT is in the 2^(nd) mode of operation. If the WT is in the second mode of operation, operation proceeds from step 4412 to step 4414; otherwise operation proceeds to step 4404.

In step 4414, the WT transmits a second additional control information report set for a period of time which is the same as said first time period, said second additional control information report including at least one report that is not included in said first additional control information report set. Operation proceeds from step 4414 to step 4416. In step 4416, the WT checks as to whether or not the WT is in the 2^(nd) mode of operation. If the WT is in the second mode of operation, operation proceeds from step 4416 to step 4410; otherwise operation proceeds to step 4404.

FIGS. 45 and 46 are used to illustrate an exemplary embodiment. FIGS. 45 and 46 are applicable to some embodiments discussed with respect to flowchart 4400 of FIG. 44. Drawing 4500 of FIG. 45 includes a initial control information report set 4502, followed by a first additional control information report set 4504, followed by a second additional control information report set 4506, followed by a 2^(nd) iteration of first additional control information report set 4508, followed by a 2^(nd) iteration of second additional control information 4510. Each control information report set (4502, 4504, 4506, 4508, 4510) has a corresponding transmission time period (4512, 4514, 4516, 4518, 4520), respectively, where the duration of each of the time periods (4512, 4514, 4516, 4518, 4520) is the same, the duration being 105 OFDM symbol transmission time periods.

Dotted line 4522 indicates that an event occurred slightly previous to the transmission of the initial control information report set transmission, the event being one of (i) a mode transition from an access mode as indicated by block 4524 to an ON state as indicated by block 4526, (ii) a mode transition from a HOLD state as indicated by block 4528 to an ON state as indicated by block 4530, and (iii) a handoff operation from a first connection in an ON state as indicated by block 4532 to a second connection in an ON state as indicated by block 4534.

As an example, initial control information report set 4502, first additional control information report set 4504 and second control information report set 4506 may be communicated during a first beaconslot, while 2^(nd) iteration of first additional control information report set 4508 and 2^(nd) iteration of second additional control information report set 4510 may be communicated during the next beaconslot. Continuing with the example, each information report set may correspond to a superslot within the beaconslot. For example, using the structure described with respect to the full-tone format of the DCCH for a wireless terminal of FIGS. 10 and 11, one possible mapping of segments corresponding to FIG. 45 is the following. The initial control information report set corresponds to FIG. 11; the first additional control information report set corresponding to indexed segments 30-34 of the beaconslot; the second additional control information set corresponds to indexed segments 30-39 of the beaconslot. FIG. 45 describes such an exemplary mapping.

Drawing 4600 of FIG. 46 describes the format of an exemplary initial control information report set. First column 4602 identifies the bit definition (5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0). Second column 4604 identifies that the first segment includes a RSVD2 report and a ULRQST4 report. Third column 4606 identifies that the second segment includes a DLSNR5 report and an ULRQST1 report. Fourth column 4608 identifies that the third segment includes a DLSSNR4 report, a RSVD1 report, and an ULRQST1 report. Fifth column 4610 identifies that the fourth segment includes a DLBNR4 report, a RSVD1 report, and a ULRQST1 report. Sixth column 4612 identifies that the fifth segment includes an ULTXBKF5 report and an ULRQST1 report.

Drawing 4630 describes the format of an exemplary 1^(st) additional control information report set. First column 4632 identifies the bit definition (5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0). Second column 4634 identifies the first segment includes a DLSNR5 report and a ULRQST1 report. Third column 4636 identifies that the second segment includes a RSVD2 report and an ULRQST4 report. Fourth column 4638 identifies that the third segment includes a DLDSNR3 report and an ULRQST3 report. Fifth column 4640 identifies that the fourth segment includes a DLSNR5 report and a ULRQST1 report. Sixth column 4642 identifies that the sixth segment includes an RSVD2 report and an ULRQST4 report.

Drawing 4660 describes the format of an exemplary 2^(nd) additional control information report set. First column 4662 identifies the bit definition (5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0). Second column 4664 identifies the first segment includes a DLDSNR3 report and a ULRQST3 report. Third column 4666 identifies that the second segment includes a DLSSNR4 report, a RSVD1 report and an ULRQST1 report. Fourth column 4668 identifies that the third segment includes a DLSNR5 report and an ULRQST1 report. Fifth column 4670 identifies that the fourth segment includes a RSVD2 report and a ULRQST4 report. Sixth column 4672 identifies that the sixth segment includes a DLDSNR3 report and an ULRQST3 report.

It can be observed in FIG. 46 that the initial and first additional reports sets will be different because they use different formats. It can also be seen that the initial control information report set includes at least two reports, DLBNR4 and ULTXBKF5, that are not included in the first additional control information report set. The DLBNR4 is an interference report and the ULTXBKF5 is a wireless terminal power availability report. In the example of FIG. 46, the second additional report includes at least one additional report that is not included in the first additional report, RSVD1 report.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart 4700 of an exemplary method of operating a communications device in accordance with various embodiments; the communications device including information indicating a predetermined report sequence for use in controlling the transmission of a plurality of different control information reports on a recurring basis. In some embodiments, the communications device is a wireless terminal, e.g., a mobile node. For example, the wireless terminal may be one of a plurality of wireless terminals in a multiple access orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) wireless communications system.

Operation starts in step 4702, and proceeds to step 4704. In step 4704 the communications device checks as to whether or at least one of the following has occurred: (i) a transition from a first mode of communications device operation to a second mode of communications device operation and (ii) a handoff operation from a first connection, e.g., with a first base station sector physical attachment point, to a second connection, e.g., with a second base station sector physical attachment point, while remaining in the second mode of communications device operation. In some embodiments, the second mode of communications device operation is an ON mode of operation, and the first mode of operation is one of a hold mode of operation and a sleep mode of operation. In some such embodiments, the communications device can transmit user data on an uplink during the ON mode of operation and is precluded from transmitting user data on the uplink during the hold and sleep modes of operation.

If at least one of the tested conditions of step 4704 was satisfied, then operation proceeds from step 4704 to either step 4706 or step 4708 depending upon the embodiment. Step 4706 is an optional step included in some embodiments, but omitted in other embodiments.

Step 4706 is included in some embodiments where the communications device supports a plurality of different initial condition control information report sets. In step 4706, the communications device selects which one of the plurality of initial control information report sets to transmit as a function of the portion of the sequence to be replaced. Operation proceeds from step 4706 to step 4708.

In step 4708, the communications device transmits an initial control information report set. In various embodiments, transmitting an initial control information report set includes transmitting at least one report which would not have been transmitted during the time period used to transmit the initial report if the transmitted reports had followed the predetermined sequence. For example, for a given initial report the at least one report which would not have been transmitted during the time period used to transmit the initial report if the transmitted reports had followed the predetermined sequence is one of an interference report, e.g., a beacon ratio report, and a communications device transmission power availability report, e.g., a communications device transmitter power backoff report. In various embodiments, the initial control information report set can include one or a plurality of reports. In some embodiments, transmitting an initial control information report set includes transmitting said initial control information report set on a dedicated uplink control channel. In some such embodiments, the dedicated uplink control channel is a single tone channel. In some such embodiments, the single tone of the single tone channel is hopped over time, e.g., the single logical channel tone changes to different physical tones due to tone hopping. In various embodiments, the predetermined report sequence repeats over a time period which is greater than a transmission time period used to transmit said initial report set. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, a predetermined reporting sequence repeats on a beaconslot basis, with a beaconslot being 912 OFDM symbol transmission time interval periods, while an exemplary time period used to transmit an initial report set may be 105 OFDM symbol transmission time periods.

Operation proceeds from step 4708 to step 4710, where the communications device checks as to whether it is in the second mode of operation. If the communications device is in the 2^(nd) mode of operation, operation proceeds to step 4712; otherwise, operation proceeds to step 4704. In step 4712, the communications device transmits an additional control information report set in accordance with the information indicated in the predetermined reporting sequence. Operation proceeds from step 4712 to step 4710.

In some embodiments, step 4712 following an initial control information report set transmission of step 4708 includes a first additional control information report set, wherein the initial control information report set includes at least one information report set that is not included in the first additional control information report set. For example, the at least one information report that is not included in said first additional control information report set is one of an interference report, e.g., a beacon ratio report, and a communications device power availability report, e.g., a communications device transmission power backoff report.

In various embodiments, the repetition of step 4712 following an initial control information report of step 4712, e.g., while the communications device remains in the second mode of operation, includes the transmission of a first additional control information report set, followed by a second additional control information report set, followed by another first additional control information report set, where the second additional control information report set includes at least one report that is not included in the first additional control information report set.

As an exemplary embodiment, consider that the predetermined report sequence is the report sequence of 40 indexed segments for the uplink dedicated control channel segments in a beaconslot as illustrated by drawing 1099 of FIG. 10. Further consider that the segments of the predetermined report sequence are grouped on a superslot basis with segment indexes (0-4), (5-9), (10-14), (15-19), (20-24), (25-29), (30-34), (35-39), and each group corresponds to a superslot of the beaconslot. If the condition of step 4704 is satisfied, e.g., the communications device has just migrated from a HOLD state of operation to an ON state of operation, the communications device uses the initial report set as indicated in Table 1199 of FIG. 11 for the first superslot, and then uses the predetermined sequence of table 1099 of FIG. 10 for subsequent superslots while remaining in the ON state. For example, the initial report set can replace any of the sets corresponding to segment index grouping (0-4), (5-9), (10-14), (15-19), (20-24), (25-29), (30-34, (35-39), depending upon when the state transition to the ON mode of operation occurs.

As a variation, consider an exemplary embodiment, where there are multiple, e.g., two, different initial control channel information report sets from which the communication device selects, as a function of the position in the sequence to be replaced. FIG. 48 illustrates two exemplary different formats of control channel information report sets 4800 and 4850. Note that in the format of initial report set #1, the 4^(th) segment 4810 includes a DLBNR4 report, a RSVD1 report, and an ULRQST1 report, while in the format of initial report set #2, the 4^(th) segment 4860 includes a RSVD2 report and a ULRQST4 report. In an exemplary embodiment using the predetermined reporting sequence of FIG. 10, if the initial control information report is to be transmitted in the 3^(rd) superslot of a beaconslot (replacing segments indexes 10-14), then the format of initial control information report set #2 4850 is used; otherwise the format of initial control information report set #1 is used. Note that in the exemplary predetermined reporting sequence of FIG. 10, the 4 bit downlink beacon ratio report, DLBNR4, only occurs once during a beaconslot, and it occurs in the 4^(th) superslot of the beaconslot. In this exemplary embodiment, the 2^(nd) set of formats of initial reports 4850 is used in the 3^(rd) superslot, since in the next subsequenct superslot of the beaconslot (the 4^(th) superslot), the communications device is scheduled, in accordance with the predetermined structure of FIG. 10, to transmit the DLBNR4 report.

As another variation, consider an exemplary embodiment, where there are multiple, e.g., five, different initial control channel information report sets from which the communications device selects, as a function of position in the sequence to be replaced, where each of the different initial control information report sets is a different size. FIG. 49 illustrates initial control information report set #1 4900, initial control information report set #2 4910 initial control information report set #3 4920 initial control information report set #4 4930 initial control information report set #5 4940. In an exemplary embodiment using the predetermined reporting sequence of FIG. 10, if the initial control information report is to be transmitted starting in segment with DCCH index value=0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 35 of the beaconslot, then initial control information report set #1 4900 is used. Alternatively, if the initial control information report is to be transmitted starting in segment with DCCH index value=1, 6, 11, 16, 21, 26, 31, or 36 of the beaconslot, then initial control information report set #2 4910 is used. Alternatively, if the initial control information report is to be transmitted starting in segment with DCCH index value=2, 7, 12, 17, 22, 27, 32, or 37 of the beaconslot, then initial control information report set #3 4920 is used. Alternatively, if the initial control information report is to be transmitted starting in segment with DCCH index value=3, 8, 13, 18, 23, 28, 33, or 38 of the beaconslot, then initial control information report set #4 4930 is used. Alternatively, if the initial control information report is to be transmitted starting in segment with DCCH index value=4, 9, 14, 19, 24, 29, 34, or 39 of the beaconslot, then initial control information report set #5 4940 is used.

Embodiments are possible where different initial information report sets differ in both the size of the report set and the content of the report set for a given DCCH segment of the superslot.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal in accordance with various embodiments. For example, the wireless terminal may be a mobile node in an exemplary spread spectrum multiple access orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) wireless communications system. Operation starts in step 5002, where the wireless terminal has been powered on, established a communications link with a base station sector attachment point, has been allocated dedicated control channel segments to use for uplink dedicated control channel reports, and has been established in either a first mode of operation or a second mode of operation. For example, in some embodiments, the first mode of operation is a full-tone mode of dedicated control channel operation, while the second mode of operation is a split tone mode of dedicated control channel operation. In some embodiments, each of the dedicated control channel segments includes the same number of tone-symbols, e.g., 21 tone-symbols. Operation proceeds from start step 5002 to step 5004. Two exemplary types of embodiments are illustrated in flowchart 5000. In a first type of embodiment, the base station sends mode control signals to command changes between first and second modes of operation. In such exemplary embodiments, operation proceeds from step 5002 to steps 5010 and 5020. In a second type of embodiment, the wireless terminal requests mode transitions between first and second modes. In such an embodiment, operation proceeds from step 5002 to steps 5026 and step 5034. Embodiments are also possible, where the base station can command mode changes without input from the wireless terminal, and where the wireless terminal can request mode changes, e.g., with the base station and wireless terminal each being capable of initiating a mode change.

In step 5004, the WT checks as to whether the WT is currently in a first or second mode of operation. If the WT is currently in a first mode of operation, e.g., a full tone mode, operation proceeds from step 5004 to step 5006. In step 5006, the WT uses a first set of dedicated control channel segments during a first period of time, said first set including a first number of dedicated control channel segments. However, if it is determined in step 5004, that the WT is in a second mode of operation, e.g., a split tone mode, operation proceeds from step 5004 to step 5008. In step 5008, the WT uses a second set of dedicated control channel segments during a second period of time having the same duration of as said first time period, said second set of control channel segments including fewer segments than said first number of segments.

For example, in one exemplary embodiment, if one considers the first period of time to be a beaconslot, the first set in the full-tone mode includes 40 DCCH segments using a single logical tone, while the second set in the split-tone mode includes 13 DCCH segments using a single logical tone. The single logical tone used by the WT in the full-mode may be same or different than the single logical tone used in the split tone mode.

As another example, in the same exemplary embodiment, if one considers the first time period to be the first 891 OFDM symbol transmission time intervals of a beaconslot, the first set in full-tone mode includes 39 DCCH segments using a single logical tone, while the second set in the split-tone mode includes 13 DCCH segments using a single logical tone. In this example, the first number of segments divided by the second number of segments is the integer 3. The single logical tone used by the WT in the full-mode may be same or different than the single logical tone used in the split tone mode.

During the second mode of operation, e.g., split-tone mode, the second set of dedicated control channel segments used by the WT is, in some embodiments, a subset of a larger set of dedicated control channel segments that can be used by the same or a different WT in a full-tone mode of operation during a time period that is not the second time period. For example, the first set of dedicated control channel segments used during the first period of time by the wireless terminal can be the larger set of dedicated control channel segments, and the first and second sets of dedicated control channel segments can correspond to the same logical tone.

Operation proceeds from step 5002 to step 5010 for each 1^(st) type of mode control signal directed to the WT, e.g., a mode control signal commanding the WT to switch from a first mode to a second mode of operation. In step 5010, the WT receives a first type mode control signal from a base station. Operation proceeds from step 5010 to step 5012. In step 5012 the WT checks as to whether or not it is currently in a first mode of operation. If the wireless terminal is in a first mode of operation, operation proceeds to step 5014 where the WT switches from a first mode of operation to a second mode of operation in response to said received control signal. However, if it is determined in step 5012 that the WT is not currently in the first mode of operation, the WT proceeds via connecting node A 5016 to step 5018, where the WT stops the implementation of the mode change since there is a misunderstanding between the base station and WT.

Operation proceeds from step 5002 to step 5020 for each 2^(nd) type of mode control signal directed to the WT, e.g., a mode control signal commanding the WT to switch from a second mode to a first mode of operation. In step 5020, the WT receives a second type mode control signal from a base station. Operation proceeds from step 5020 to step 5022. In step 5022 the WT checks as to whether or not it is currently in a second mode of operation. If the wireless terminal is in a second mode of operation, operation proceeds to step 5024 where the WT switches from a second mode of operation to a first mode of operation in response to said received second mode control signal. However, if it is determined in step 5022 that the WT is not currently in the second mode of operation, the WT proceeds via connecting node A 5016 to step 5018, where the WT stops the implementation of the mode change since there is a misunderstanding between the base station and WT.

In some embodiments, the first and/or second type of mode control change command signal from a base station also include information identifying whether the logical tone used by the WT will change following the mode switch and, in some embodiments, information identifying the logical tone to be used by the WT in the new mode. In some embodiments, if the WT proceeds to step 5018, the WT signals the base station, e.g., indicating that there is a misunderstanding and that a mode transition has not been completed.

Operation proceeds from step 5002 to step 5026 for each time that the wireless terminal proceeds to initiate a mode change from a first mode of operation, e.g., full-tone DCCH mode, to a second mode of operation, e.g., split-tone DCCH mode. In step 5026, the WT transmits a mode control signal to a base station. Operation proceeds from step 5026 to step 5028. In step 5028 the WT receives an acknowledgement signal from the base station. Operation proceeds from step 5028 to step 5030. In step 5030 if the received acknowledgement signal is a positive acknowledgment, operation proceeds to step 5032, where the wireless terminal switches from a first mode of operation to a second mode of operation in response to said received positive acknowledgement signal. However, if in step 5030, the WT determines that the received signal is a negative acknowledgment signal or the WT cannot successfully decode the received signal the WT proceeds via connecting node A 5016 to step 5018 where the WT stops the mode change operation.

Operation proceeds from step 5002 to step 5034 for each time that the wireless terminal proceeds to initiate a mode change from a second mode of operation, e.g., split-tone DCCH mode, to a second mode of operation, e.g., full-tone DCCH mode. In step 5034, the WT transmits a mode control signal to a base station. Operation proceeds from step 5034 to step 5036. In step 5036 the WT receives an acknowledgement signal from the base station. Operation proceeds from step 5036 to step 5038. In step 5038 if the received acknowledgement signal is a positive acknowledgment, operation proceeds to step 5040, where the wireless terminal switches from a second mode of operation to a first mode of operation in response to said received positive acknowledgement signal. However, if in step 5038, the WT determines that the received signal is a negative acknowledgment signal or the WT cannot successfully decode the received signal the WT proceeds via connecting node A 5016 to step 5018 where the WT stops the mode change operation.

FIG. 51 is a drawing illustrating exemplary operation in accordance with various embodiments. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 51, the dedicated control channel is structured to use a repeating pattern of 16 segments indexed from 0 to 15, for each logical tone in the dedicated control channel. Other embodiments may use a different number of indexed DCCH segments in a recurring pattern, e.g., 40 segments. Four exemplary logical DCCH tones, indexed (0, 1, 2, 3) are illustrated in FIG. 51. In some embodiments, each segment occupies the same amount of air link resources. For example, in some embodiments, each segment has same number of tone-symbols, e.g., 21 tone-symbols. Drawing 5100 identifies the index of the segments over time for two successive iterations of the pattern corresponding to a logical tone in drawing 5104.

Drawing 5104 plots logical DCCH tone index on vertical axis 5106 vs time on horizontal axis 5108. A first time period 5110 and a second time period 5112 are shown which have the same duration. Legend 5114 identifies: (i) squares with widely spaced crosshatch shading 5116 represents WT1 full-tone DCCH mode segments, (ii) squares with widely spaced vertical and horizontal line shading 5118 represent WT4 full-tone DCCH mode segments, (iii) squares with narrowly spaced vertical and horizontal line shading 5120 represent WT5 full-tone DCCH mode segments, (iv) squares with fine crosshatch shading 5122 represent WT6 full-tone DCCH mode segments, (v) squares with widely spaced diagonal line shading sloping upward from left to right 5124 represent WT1 split-tone DCCH mode segments, (vi) squares with narrowly spaced diagonal line shading sloping downward from left to right 5126 represent WT2 split-tone DCCH mode segments, (vii) squares with narrowly spaced diagonal line shading sloping upward from left to right 5128 represent WT3 split-tone DCCH mode segments, and (viii) squares with widely spaced vertical line shading 5130 represent WT4 split-tone DCCH mode segments.

In drawing 5104, it may be observed that WT1 is in full-tone DCCH mode during the first time period 5110 and uses a set of 15 segments (indexed 0-14) corresponding to logical tone 0 during that time period. During the 2^(nd) time period 5112, which is the same duration as the first time period, WT1 is in split-tone DCCH mode and uses a set of 5 segments with index values (0, 3, 6, 9, 12) corresponding to logical tone 0, which is a subset of the set of segments used during the 1^(st) time period 5110.

In drawing 5104, it may also be observed that WT4 is in full-tone DCCH mode during 1^(st) time period 5110 and uses a set of 15 segments (indexed 0-14) corresponding to logical tone 2, and WT4 is in split tone format during 2^(nd) time period 5112 and uses a set of 5 segments with index values (1, 4, 7, 10, 13) corresponding to logical tone 3. It should also be observed that the set of 5 segments with index values (1, 4, 7, 10, 13) corresponding to logical tone 3 is part of a larger set of segments used by WT6 in full-tone DCCH mode during the 1^(st) time period 5110.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart 5200 of an exemplary method of operating a base station in accordance with various embodiments. Operation of the exemplary method starts in step 5202, where the base station is powered on and initialized. Operation proceeds to steps 5204 and steps 5206. In step 5204, the base station, on an ongoing basis, partitions the dedicated control channel resources between full-tone DCCH sub-channels and split tone DCCH sub-channel and allocates the full-tone and split tone DCCH sub-channels among a plurality of wireless terminals. For example, in an exemplary embodiment the DCCH channel uses 31 logical tones and each logical tone corresponds to 40 DCCH channel segments in a single iteration of a repeating pattern, e.g., on a beaconslot basis. At any given time each logical tone can correspond to either a full-tone DCCH mode of operation where DCCH segments corresponding to the tone are allocated to a single WT, or a split tone DCCH mode where DCCH segments corresponding to the tone can be allocated to up to a fixed maximum number of WTs, e.g., where the fixed maximum number of WTs=3. In such an exemplary embodiment using 31 logical tones for the DCCH channel, if each of the DCCH channel logical tones are in full-tone mode, the base station sector attachment point can have allocated DCCH segments to 31 WTs. At the other extreme if each of the DCCH channel logical tones are in split-tone format, then 93 WTs can be assigned segments. In general, at any given time the DCCH channel is partitioned and may include a mixture of full and split tone sub-channels, e.g., to accommodate current loading conditions and current needs of the WTs using the base station as their attachment point.

FIG. 53 illustrates exemplary partitioning and allocation of dedicated control channel resources for another exemplary embodiment, e.g., an embodiment using 16 indexed DCCH segments corresponding to a logical tone which repeat on a recurring basis. The method described with respect to FIG. 53 may be used in step 5204 and may be extended to other embodiments.

Step 5204 includes sub-step 5216, in which the base station communicates to the WTs sub-channel allocation information. Sub-step 5216 includes sub-step 5218. In sub-step 5218, the base station assigns user identifiers to WTs receiving allocation of dedicated control channel segments, e.g., on state user identifiers.

In step 5206, the base station, on an ongoing basis, receives uplink signals from WTs including dedicated control channel reports communicated on the allocated DCCH sub-channels. In some embodiments, the wireless terminals use different coding to communicate information transmitted in DCCH segments during a full-tone DCCH mode of operation and during a split-tone DCCH mode of operation; therefore the base station performs different decoding operations based on the mode.

Two exemplary types of embodiments are illustrated in flowchart 5200. In a first type of embodiment, the base station sends mode control signals to command changes between first and second modes of operation, e.g., between full-tone DCCH mode and split-tone DCCH mode. In such exemplary embodiments, operation proceeds from step 5202 to steps 5208 and 5010. In a second type of embodiment, the wireless terminal requests mode transitions between first and second modes, e.g., between full-tone DCCH mode and split-tone DCCH mode. In such an embodiment, operation proceeds from step 5202 to steps 5212 and step 5214. Embodiments are also possible where the base station can command mode changes without input from the wireless terminal, and where the wireless terminal can request mode changes, e.g., with the base station and wireless terminal each being capable of initiating a mode change.

Operation proceeds to step 5208 for each instance where the base station decides to command a WT to change from a first mode, e.g., full-mode DCCH mode to a second mode, e.g. split-tone DCCH mode. In step 5208, the base station sends a mode control signal to a WT to initiate a WT transition from a first mode, e.g., full-tone DCCH mode, to a second mode, e.g., split-tone DCCH mode.

Operation proceeds to step 5210 for each instance where the base station decides to command a WT to change from the second mode, e.g., split-mode DCCH mode, to the first mode, e.g. full-tone DCCH mode. In step 5210, the base station sends a mode control signal to a WT to initiate a WT transition from the second mode, e.g., split-tone DCCH mode, to the first mode, e.g., full-tone DCCH mode.

Operation proceeds to step 5212 for each instance where the base station receives a request from a WT to change from a first mode, e.g., full-tone DCCH mode to a second mode, e.g. split-tone DCCH mode. In step 5212, the base station receives a mode control signal from a WT requesting a transition from a first mode of operation to a second mode of operation, e.g., from full-tone DCCH mode to split-tone DCCH mode. Operation proceeds from step 5212 to step 5220, if the base station decides to accommodate the request. In step 5220, the base station transmits a positive acknowledgement signal to the WT which sent the request.

Operation proceeds to step 5214 for each instance where the base station receives a request from a WT to change from a second mode, e.g., split-tone DCCH mode to a first mode, e.g. full-tone DCCH mode. In step 5214, the base station receives a mode control signal from a WT requesting a transition from a second mode of operation to a first mode of operation, e.g., from split-tone DCCH mode to full-tone DCCH mode. Operation proceeds from step 5214 to step 5222, if the base station decides to accommodate the request. In step 5222, the base station transmits a positive acknowledgement signal to the WT which sent the request.

FIG. 53 is a drawing illustrating exemplary operation in accordance with various embodiments. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 53, the dedicated control channel is structured to use a repeating pattern of 16 segments indexed from 0 to 15, for each logical tone in the dedicated control channel. Other embodiments may use a different number of indexed DCCH segments in a recurring pattern, e.g., 40 segments. Three exemplary logical DCCH tones, indexed (0, 1, 2) are illustrated in FIG. 53. In some embodiments, each segment occupies the same amount of air link resources. For example, in some embodiments, each segment has same number of tone-symbols, e.g., 21 tone-symbols. Drawing 5300 identifies the index of the segments over time for two successive iterations of the recurring indexing pattern corresponding to a logical tone in drawing 5304.

Drawing 5304 plots logical DCCH tone index on vertical axis 5306 vs time on horizontal axis 5308. A first time period 5310 and a second time period 5312 are shown which have the same duration. Legend 5314 identifies: (i) squares with widely spaced crosshatch shading 5316 represents WT1 full-tone DCCH mode segments, (ii) squares with narrowly spaced crosshatch shading 5318 represents WT2 full-tone DCCH mode segments, (iii) squares with widely spaced vertical and horizontal line shading 5320 represent WT4 full-tone DCCH mode segments, (iv) squares with narrowly spaced vertical and horizontal line shading 5322 represent WT9 full-tone DCCH mode segments, (v) squares with widely spaced diagonal line shading sloping upward from left to right 5324 represent WT1 split-tone DCCH mode segments (vi) squares with narrowly spaced diagonal line shading sloping downward from left to right 5326 represent WT2 split-tone DCCH mode segments, (vii) squares with narrowly spaced diagonal line shading sloping upward from left to right 5328 represent WT3 split-tone DCCH mode segments, (viii) squares with widely spaced vertical line shading 5330 represent WT4 split-tone DCCH mode segments, and (ix) squares with narrowly spaced vertical line shading 5332 represent WT5 split-tone DCCH mode segments, (x) squares with widely spaced horizontal line shading 5334 represent WT6 split-tone DCCH mode segments, (xi) squares with narrowly spaced horizontal line shading 5336 represent WT7 split-tone DCCH mode segments, and (xii) squares with dot shading 5338 represent WT8 split-tone DCCH mode segments.

In drawing 5304, it may be observed that WT1 is in full-tone DCCH mode during the first time period 5310 and uses a set of 15 segments (indexed 0-14) corresponding to logical tone 0 during that time period. In accordance with some embodiments, a base station allocated a first dedicated control sub-channel to WT1, the first dedicated control sub-channel including the set of 15 segments (indexed 0-14) corresponding to logical tone 0 for use during 1^(st) time period 5310.

In drawing 5304, it may also be observed that WT2, WT3, and WT4 are each split-tone DCCH mode during the first time period 5310 and each use a set of 5 segments indexed ((0, 3, 6, 9, 12), (1, 4, 7, 10, 13), (2, 5, 8, 11, 14)), respectively corresponding to the same logical tone, logical tone 1 during 1st time period 5310. In accordance with some embodiments, a base station allocated a (second, third, and fourth) dedicated control sub-channel to (WT2, WT3, WT3), the (second, third, and fourth) dedicated control sub-channels each including a set of 5 segments with index values ((0, 3, 6, 9, 12), (1, 4, 7, 10, 13), (2, 5, 8, 11, 14)), respectively corresponding to the same logical tone, logical tone 1 during 1st time period 5310.

In drawing 5304, it may also be observed that WT6, WT7, and WT8 are each split-tone DCCH mode during the first time period 5310 and each use a set of 5 segments indexed ((0, 3, 6, 9, 12), (1, 4, 7, 10, 13), (2, 5, 8, 11, 14)), respectively corresponding to the same logical tone, logical tone 2 during 1st time period 5310. In accordance with some embodiments, a base station allocated a (fifth, sixth, and seventh) dedicated control sub-channel to (WT6, WT7, WT8), the (fifth, sixth, and seventh) dedicated control sub-channels each including a set of 5 segments with index values ((0, 3, 6, 9, 12), (1, 4, 7, 10, 13), (2, 5, 8, 11, 14)), respectively corresponding to the same logical tone, logical tone 2 during 1st time period 5310.

In drawing 5304, it may be observed that (WT1, WT5) are in split-tone DCCH mode during the second time period 5312 and each uses a set of 5 segments with index values (0, 3, 6, 9, 12), (1, 4, 7, 10, 13)), respectively, corresponding to logical tone 0 during the second time period 5312. In accordance with various embodiments, a base station allocated an (eighth, ninth) dedicated control sub-channel to (WT1, WT5), the (eighth, ninth) dedicated control sub-channel including the set of 5 segments with index (0, 3, 6, 9, 12), (1, 4, 7, 10, 13)), respectively, corresponding to logical tone 0 during the second time period 5312. WT1 used logical tone 0 during the first time period, while WT 5 did not use logical tone 0 during the first time period.

In drawing 5304, it may also be observed that (WT2) is in full-tone DCCH mode during the second time period 5312 and uses a set of 15 segments indexed (0-14) corresponding to logical tone 1 during the second time period 5312. In accordance with some embodiments, a base station allocated a (tenth) dedicated control sub-channel to (WT2), the dedicated control sub-channel including the set of 15 segments indexed (0-14) corresponding to logical tone 1 during the second time period 5312. It may be noted that WT2 is one of the WTs from the set of (WT2, WT3, WT4) which used logical tone 1 during the first time period 5310.

In drawing 5304, it may also be observed that (WT9) is in full-tone DCCH mode during the second time period 5312 and each uses a set of 15 segments indexed (0-14) corresponding to logical tone 2 during the second time period 5312. In accordance with some embodiments, a base station allocated an (eleventh) dedicated control sub-channel to (WT9), the dedicated control sub-channel including the set of 15 segments indexed (0-14) corresponding to logical tone 2 during the second time period 5312. It may be noted that WT9 is a different WT than the WTs (WT6, WT7, WT8) which used logical tone 2 during the first time period 5310.

In some embodiments, the logical tones (tone 0, tone 1, tone 2) are subjected to an uplink tone hopping operation which determines which physical tones the logical tones correspond to for each of a plurality of symbol transmission time periods, e.g., in the first time period 5310. For example, logical tones 0, 1, and 2 may be part of a logical channel structure including 113 logical tones, which are hopped, in accordance with a hopping sequence to a set of 113 physical tones used for uplink signaling. Continuing with the example, consider that each DCCH segment corresponds to a single logical tone and corresponds to 21 successive OFDM symbol transmission time intervals. In an exemplary embodiment, the logical tone is hopped such that the logical tone corresponding to three physical tones, with the wireless terminal using each physical tone for seven consecutive symbol transmission time intervals of the segment.

In an exemplary embodiment using 40 indexed DCCH channel segments corresponding to a logical tone which repeat on a recurring basis, an exemplary 1^(st) and 2^(nd) time period may each include 39 DCCH segments, e.g., the first 39 DCCH segments of a beaconslot corresponding to the logical tone. In such an embodiment, if a given tone is in full-tone format, a WT is allocated by the base station a set of 39 DCCH segments for the 1^(st) or 2^(nd) time period corresponding to the allocation. If a given tone is in split-tone format, a WT is allocated a set of 13 DCCH segments for the 1^(st) or 2^(nd) time period corresponding to the allocation. In full-tone mode the 40^(th) indexed segment can also be allocated to and used by the WT in full-tone mode. In split-tone mode, in some embodiments, the 40^(th) indexed segment is a reserved segment.

FIG. 54 is a drawing of a flowchart 5400 of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal in accordance with various embodiments. Operation starts in step 5402 where the wireless terminal is powered on and initialized. Operation proceeds from step 5402 to steps 5404, 5406, and 5408. In step 5404, the wireless terminal measures the received power of a downlink null channel (DL.NCH) and determines an interference power (N). For example, the Null channel corresponds to predetermined tone-symbols in an exemplary downlink timing and frequency structure used by the base station serving as the current attachment point for the wireless terminal in which the base station intentionally does not transmit using those tone-symbols; therefore, received power on the NULL channel measured by the wireless terminal receiver represents interference. In step 5406, the wireless terminal measures the received power (G*P₀) of a downlink pilot channel (DL.PICH). In step 5408, the wireless terminal measures the signal to noise ratio (SNR₀) of the downlink pilot channel (DL.PICH). Operation proceeds from steps 5404, 5406, and 5408 to step 5410.

In step 5410, the wireless terminal calculates the saturation level of the downlink signal to noise ratio as a function of: the interference power, measured received power of the downlink pilot channel, and measured SNR of the downlink pilot channel. For example, saturation level of the DL SNR=1/a₀=(1/SNR₀−N/(GP₀))⁻¹. Operation proceeds from step 5410 to steps 5412. In step 5412, the wireless terminal selects the closet value from a predetermined table of quantized level of saturation level of downlink SNR to represent the calculated saturation level in a dedicated control channel report, and the wireless terminal generates the report. Operation proceeds from step 5412 to step 5414. In step 5414, the wireless terminal transmits the generated report to the base station, said generated report being communicated using a dedicated control channel segment allocated to the wireless terminal, e.g., using a predetermined portion of a predetermined indexed dedicated control channel segment. For example, the exemplary WT may be in a full-tone format mode of DCCH operation using the repetitive reporting structure of FIG. 10, and the report may be the DLSSNR4 reports of DCCH segment 1036 with index numbers s2=36.

FIG. 55 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal 5500, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary WT 5500 may be any of the wireless terminals of the exemplary system of FIG. 1. Exemplary wireless terminal 5500 includes a receiver module 5502, a transmitter module 5504, a processor 5506, user I/O devices 5508, and a memory 5510 coupled together via a bus 5512 over which the wireless terminal 5500 interchanges data and information.

The receiver module 5502, e.g., an OFDM receiver, is coupled to a receive antenna 5503 via which the wireless terminal 5500 receives downlink signals from base stations. Downlink signals received by the wireless terminal 5500 include: mode control signals, mode control request response signals, assignment signals including the assignment of user identifiers, e.g., an ON identifier associated with a logical uplink dedicated control channel tone, uplink and/or downlink traffic channel assignment signals, downlink traffic channel signals, and downlink base station identification signals. Receiver module 5502 includes a decoder 5518 via which the wireless terminal 5500 decodes received signals which had been encoded prior to transmission by the base station. The transmitter module 5504, e.g., an OFDM transmitter, is coupled to a transmit antenna 5505 via which the wireless terminal 5500 transmits uplink signals to base stations. In some embodiments, the same antenna is used for transmitter and receiver. Uplink signals transmitted by the wireless terminal include: mode request signals, access signals, dedicated control channel segment signals during first and second modes of operation, and uplink traffic channel signals. Transmitter module 5504 includes an encoder 5520 via which the wireless terminal 5500 encodes at least some uplink signals prior to transmission. Encoder 5520 includes a 1^(st) coding module 5522 and a 2^(nd) coding module 5524. 1^(st) coding module 5522 codes information to be transmitted in DCCH segments during the first mode of operation according to a first coding method. 2^(nd) coding module 5524 codes information to be transmitted in DCCH segments during the second mode of operation according to a second coding method; the first and second coding methods are different.

User I/O devices 5508, e.g., microphone, keyboard, keypad, mouse, switches, camera, display, speaker, etc., are used to input data/information, output data/information, and control at least some functions of the wireless terminal, e.g., initiate a communications session. Memory 5510 includes routines 5526 and data/information 5528. The processor 5506, e.g., a CPU, executes the routines 5526 and uses the data/information 5528 in memory 5510 to control the operation of the wireless terminal 5500 and implement methods.

Routines 5526 include a communications routine 5530 and wireless terminal control routines 5532. The communications routine 5530 implements the various communications protocols used by the wireless terminal 5500. The wireless terminal control routines 5532 control operation of the wireless terminal 5500 including controlling operation of the receiver module 5502, transmitter module 5504 and user I/O devices 5508. Wireless terminal control routines 5532 include a first mode dedicated control channel communications module 5534, a second mode dedicated control channel communications module 5536, a dedicated control channel mode control module 5538, a mode request signal generation module 5540, a response detection module 5542, and an uplink dedicated control channel tone determination module 5543.

The first mode dedicated control channel communications module 5534 controls dedicated control channel communications using a first set of dedicated control channel segments during a first mode of operation, said first set including a first number of control channel segments for a first period of time. The first mode is, in some embodiments, a full tone mode, of dedicated control channel operation. The second mode dedicated control channel communications module 5536 controls dedicated control channel communications using a second set of dedicated control channel segments during a second mode of operation, said second set of dedicated control channel segments corresponding to a time period having the same duration as said first period of time, said second set of dedicated control channel segments including fewer segments than said first number of dedicated control channel segments. The second mode is, in some embodiments, a split-tone mode, of dedicated control channel operation. In various embodiments, a dedicated control channel segment whether in the first mode or the second mode of operation uses the same amount of uplink air link resources, e.g., the same number of tone-symbols, e.g., 21 tone-symbols. For example, a dedicated control channel segment may correspond to one logical tone in the timing and frequency structure being used by the base station, but may correspond to three physical tones with three sets of seven tone-symbols each being associated with a different physical uplink tone in accordance with uplink tone hopping information.

DCCH mode control module 5538, in some embodiments, controls switching into one said first mode of operation and said second mode of operation in response to a received mode control signal from a base station, e.g., a mode control command signal from a base station. In some embodiments, the mode control signal also identifies, for the split tone mode of operation, which set of uplink dedicated control channel segments is associated with the split tone mode of operation. For example, for a given logical DCCH channel tone, in split tone operation, there may be a plurality, e.g., three, non-overlapping sets of DCCH segments and the mode control signal may identify which of the sets is to be associated with the wireless terminal. DCCH mode control module 5538, in some embodiments, controls switching into a requested mode of operation which is one of the first mode of operation, e.g., full-tone DCCH mode, and the second mode of operation, e.g., split-tone DCCH mode, in response to a received affirmative request acknowledgment signal.

Mode request generation module 5540 generates a mode request signal indicating a requested mode of DCCH operation. Response detection module 5542 detects a response to said mode request signal from the base station. The output of response detection module 5542 is used by the DCCH mode control module 5538 to determine if the wireless terminal 5500is to be switched into the requested mode of operation.

Uplink DCCH tone determination module 5543 determines the physical tone to which an assigned logical DCCH tone corresponds to over time based on the uplink tone hopping information stored in the wireless terminal.

Data/information 5528 includes user/device/session/resource information 5544, system data/information 5546, current mode of operation information 5548, terminal ID information 5550, DCCH logical tone information 5552, mode request signal information 5554, timing information 5556, base station identification information 5558, data 5560, DCCH segment signal information 5562, and mode request response signal information 5564. User/device/session/resource information 5544 includes information corresponding to peer nodes in communications sessions with WT 5500, address information, routing information, session information including authentication information, and resource information including allocated DCCH segments and uplink and/or downlink traffic channel segments associated with the communications session which are allocated to WT 5500. Current mode of operation information 5548 includes information identifying whether the wireless terminal is currently in a first, e.g., fall-tone DCCH mode of operation, or a second, e.g., split-tone DCCH mode of operation. In some embodiments, the first and second modes of operation with respect to the DCCH both correspond to wireless terminal On states of operation. Current mode of operation information 5548 also includes information identifying other modes of wireless terminal operation, e.g., sleep, hold, etc. Terminal identifier information 5550 includes base station assigned wireless terminal identifiers, e.g., registered user identifier and/or an ON state identifier. In some embodiments, the ON state identifier is associated with a DCCH logical tone being used by the base station sector attachment point which allocated the On state identifier to the wireless terminal. DCCH logical tone information 5552 includes, when the wireless terminal is in one of first mode of DCCH operation and a second mode of DCCH operation, information identifying the DCCH logical tone currently allocated to the wireless terminal to use when communicating uplink DCCH segment signals. Timing information 5556 includes information identifying the wireless terminals current timing within the repetitive timing structure being used by the base stations serving as an attachment point for the wireless terminal. Base station identification information 5558 includes base station identifiers, base station sector identifiers, and base station tone block and/or carrier identifiers associated with the base station sector attachment point being used by the wireless terminal. Data 5560 includes uplink and/or downlink user data being communicated in communications sessions, e.g., voice, audio data, image data, text data, file data. DCCH segment signal information 5562 includes information to be communicated corresponding to DCCH segments allocated to the wireless terminal, e.g., information bits to be communicated in DCCH segments representing various control information reports. Mode request signal information 5554 includes information corresponding to mode request signals generated by module 5540. Mode request response signal information 5564 includes response information detected by module 5542.

System data/information 5546 includes full tone mode DCCH information 5566, split-tone mode DCCH information 5568, and a plurality of sets of base station data/information (base station 1 data/information 5570, . . . , base station M data/information 5572). Full tone mode DCCH information 5566 includes channel structure information 5574 and segment coding information 5576. Full tone mode DCCH channel structure information 5574 includes information identifying segments and reports to be communicated in segments when the wireless terminal is in a full-tone DCCH mode of operation. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, there is a plurality of DCCH tones, e.g., 31 in the DCCH channel, each logical DCCH tone when in the full-tone mode, following a recurring pattern of forty DCCH segments associated with the single logical DCCH tone in the DCCH channel. Full tone mode DCCH segment coding information 5576 includes information used by 1^(st) coding module 5522 to encode DCCH segments. Split-tone mode DCCH information 5568 includes channel structure information 5578 and segment coding information 5580. Split-tone mode DCCH channel structure information 5578 includes information identifying segments and reports to be communicated in segments when the wireless terminal is in a split-tone DCCH mode of operation. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, there is a plurality of DCCH tones, e.g., 31 in the DCCH channel, each logical DCCH tone when in the split-tone mode is split over time among up to three different WTs. For example, for a given logical DCCH tone a WT receives a set of 13 DCCH segments to use out of 40 segments in a recurring pattern, each set of 13 DCCH segments being non-overlapping with the other two sets of 13 DCCH segments. In such an embodiment, one may consider, e.g., a time interval in the structure including 39 DCCH segments allocated to a single WT if in the full-tone mode, but partitioned among three wireless terminals in the split-tone format. Split-tone mode DCCH segment coding information 5580 includes information used by 2^(nd) coding module 5524 to encode DCCH segments.

In some embodiments, during one time period a given logical DCCH tone is used in a full-tone mode of operation, while at other times the same logical DCCH tone is used in a split tone mode of operation. Thus WT 5500 can be allocated a set of DCCH channel segments in a recurring structure while in the split-tone mode of DCCH operation which is a subset of a larger set of DCCH channel segments used in the full-tone mode of operation.

Base station 1 data/information 5570 includes base station identification information used to identify base station, sector, carrier and/or tone block associated with an attachment point. Base station 1 data/information 5570 also includes downlink timing/frequency structure information 5582 and uplink timing/frequency structure information 5584. Uplink timing/frequency structure information 5584 includes uplink tone hopping information 5586.

FIG. 56 is a drawing of an exemplary base station 5600, e.g., access node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary base station 5600 may be any of the base stations of the exemplary system of FIG. 1. Exemplary base station 5600 includes a receiver module 5602, a transmitter module 5604, a processor 5608, an I/O interface 5610, and a memory 5612 coupled together via a bus 5614 over which the various elements interchange data and information.

Receiver module 5602, e.g., an OFDM receiver, receives uplink signals from a plurality of wireless terminals via receive antenna 5603. The uplink signals include dedicated control channel segment signals from wireless terminals, requests for mode changes, and uplink traffic channel segment signals. Receiver module 5602 includes a decoder module 5615 for decoding uplink signals which were encoded prior to transmission by the wireless terminals. The decoder module 5615 includes a first decoder sub-module 5616 and a second decoder sub-module 5618. The first decoder sub-module 5616 decodes information received in dedicated control channel segments corresponding to logical tones used in a full-tone DCCH mode of operation. The second decoder sub-module 5618 decodes information received in dedicated control channel segments corresponding to logical tones used in a split-tone DCCH mode of operation; the first and second decoder sub-modules (5616, 5618) implement different decoding methods.

Transmitter module 5604, e.g., an OFDM transmitter, transmits downlink signals to wireless terminals via transmit antenna 5605. Transmitted downlink signals include registration signals, DCCH control signals, traffic channel assignment signals, and downlink traffic channel signals.

I/O interface 5610 provides an interface for coupling the base station 5600 to other network nodes, e.g., other base stations, AAA server nodes, home agent nodes, routers, etc., and/or the Internet. I/O interface 5610 allows a wireless terminal using base station 5600 as its point of network attachment to communicate with peer nodes, e.g., other wireless terminals, in different cells, via a backhaul communication network.

Memory 5612 includes routines 5620 and data/information 5622. The processor 5608, e.g. a CPU, executes the routines 5620 and uses the data/information 5622 in memory 5612 to control the operation of the base station 5600 and implement methods. Routines 5620 include a communications routines 5624, and base station control routines 5626. The communications routines 5624 implement the various communications protocols used by the base station 5600. Base station control routines 5626 include a control channel resource allocation module 5628, a logical tone dedication module 5630, a wireless terminal dedicated control channel mode control module 5632, and a scheduler module 5634.

The control channel resource allocation module 5628 allocates dedicated control channel resources including logical tones corresponding to dedicated control channel segments in an uplink. The control channel resource allocation module 5628 includes a full tone allocation sub-module 5636 and a split-tone allocation sub-module 5638. The full tone allocation sub-module 5636 allocates one of said logical tones corresponding to the dedicated control channel to a single wireless terminal. The split-tone allocation sub-module 5638 allocates different sets of dedicated control channel segments corresponding to one of the logical tones corresponding to the dedicated control channel to a plurality of wireless terminals to be used on a time shared basis with each of the plurality of wireless terminal being dedicated a different non-overlapping portion of time in which said logical tone is to be used on a time shared basis. For example, in some embodiments, a single logical dedicated control channel tone may be allocated to and shared by up three wireless terminals in the split-tone mode of operation. At any given time full tone allocation sub-module 5636 may be operating on none, some, or each of the DCCH channel tones; at any given time the split-tone allocation sub-module 5638 may be operating on none, some, or each of the DCCH channel tones.

The logical tone dedication module 5630 controls whether a logical dedicated control channel tone is to be used to implement a full tone dedicated control channel or a split-tone dedicated control channel. The logical tone dedication module 5630 is responsive to wireless terminal loading to adjust the number of logical tones dedicated to full-tone dedicated control channels and to split-tone dedicated control channels. In some embodiments, the logical tone dedication module 5630 is responsive to requests from a wireless terminal to operate in either a full-tone mode or a split-tone mode and adjusts the allocation of logical tones as a function of received wireless terminal requests. For example, base station 5600, in some embodiments, for a given sector and uplink tone block uses a set of logical tones for the dedicated control channels, e.g., 31 logical tones, and at any given time the logical dedicated control channel tones are partitioned among full-tone mode logical tones and split-tone mode logical tones by logical tone dedication module 5630.

Wireless terminal dedicated control channel mode control module 5632 generates control signals for indicating logical tone assignments and dedicated control channel mode assignments to wireless terminals. In some embodiments, a wireless terminal is assigned an ON state identifier by the generated control signals, and the value of the ON identifier is associated with a particular logical dedicated control channel tone in the uplink channel structure. In some embodiments, the assignments generated by module 5632 indicate that a wireless terminal corresponding to an assignment should operate in a full tone or split-tone mode with respect to an assigned logical tone. The split tone mode assignments further indicate which of a plurality of segments corresponding to an assigned logical dedicated control channel tone the wireless terminal corresponding to the assignment should use.

Scheduler module 5634 schedules uplink and/or downlink traffic channel segments to wireless terminals, e.g., to wireless terminals which are using the base station 5600 as their point of network attachment, are in an On state and currently have an assigned dedicated control channel either in split-tone mode or full-tone mode.

Data/information 5622 includes system data/information 5640, current DCCH logical tone implementation information 5642, received DCCH signal information 5644, DCCH control signal information 5646, and a plurality of sets of wireless terminal data/information 5648 (WT 1 data/information 5650, . . . , WT N data/information 5652). System data/information 5640 includes full tone mode DCCH information 5654, split-tone mode DCCH information 5656, downlink timing/frequency structure information 5658 and uplink timing/frequency structure information 5660. Full-tone mode DCCH information 5654 includes full-tone mode channel structure information 5662 and full tone mode segment coding information 5664. Split-tone mode DCCH information 5656 includes split-tone mode channel structure information 5666 and split-tone mode segment coding information 5668. Uplink timing/frequency structure information 5660 includes uplink tone hopping information 5660. Each single logical tone in an uplink tone block channel structure corresponds to a physical tone which is hopped in frequency over time. For example consider a single logical dedicated control channel tone. In some embodiments, each DCCH segment corresponding to the single logical DCCH tone comprises 21 OFDM tone-symbols corresponding to a first physical tone used for seven consecutive OFDM symbol time periods, a second physical tone used for seven consecutive OFDM symbol time periods, and a third physical tone used for seven consecutive OFDM symbol time periods, the first, second, and third tones being selected in accordance with an implemented uplink tone-hopping sequence known to both the base station and wireless terminal. For at least some of the dedicated control channel logical tones for at least some DCCH segments, the first, second and third physical tones are different.

Current DCCH logical tone implementation information 5642 includes information identifying the decisions of logical tone dedication module 5630, e.g., whether each given logical dedicated control channel tone is currently being used in full-tone format or split-tone format. Received DCCH signal information 5644 includes information received on any of the dedicated control channel segments in the uplink dedicated control channel structure of the base station 5600. DCCH control signal information 5646 includes assignment information corresponding to assigning dedicated control channel logical tones and modes of dedicated control channel operation. DCCH control signal information 5646 also includes received requests from a wireless terminal for a dedicated control channel, requests for a DCCH mode of operation, and/or requests for a change of DCCH mode of operation. DCCH control signal information 5646 also includes acknowledgment signaling information in response to received requests from wireless terminals.

WT 1 data/information 5650 includes identification information 5662, received DCCH information 5664, and user data 5666. Identification information 5662 includes a base station assigned WT On identifier 5668 and mode information 5670. In some embodiments, the base station assigned On identifier value is associated with a logical dedicated control channel tone in the uplink channel structure used by the base station. Mode information 5650 includes information identifying whether the WT is in a full-tone DCCH mode of operation or a split-tone mode DCCH mode of operation, and when the WT is in a split tone-mode information associating the WT with a subset of DCCH segments associated with the logical tone. Received DCCH information 5664 includes received DCCH reports associated with WT1, e.g., conveying uplink traffic channel requests, beacon ratio reports, power reports, self-noise reports, and/or signal to noise ratio reports. User data 5666 includes uplink and/or downlink traffic channel user data associated with WT1, e.g., voice data, audio data, image data, text data, file data, etc., corresponding to communications sessions and communicated via uplink and/or downlink traffic channel segments allocated to the WT1.

FIG. 57 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal 5700, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary WT 5700 may be any of the wireless terminals of the exemplary system of FIG. 1. Exemplary wireless terminal 5700 includes a receiver module 5702, a transmitter module 5704, a processor 5706, user I/O devices 5708, and a memory 5710 coupled together via a bus 5712 over which the wireless terminal interchanges data and information.

The receiver module 5702, e.g., an OFDM receiver, is coupled to a receive antenna 5703 via which the wireless terminal 5700 receives downlink signals from base stations. Downlink signals received by the wireless terminal 5700 include beacon signals, pilot signals, registration response signals, power control signals, timing control signals, assignments of wireless terminal identifiers, e.g., an On state identifier corresponding to a DCCH channel logical tone, other DCCH assignment information, e.g., used to identify a set of DCCH channel segments in a uplink repetitive structure, assignments of uplink traffic channel segments and/or assignment of downlink traffic channel segments. Receiver module 5702 includes a decoder 5714 via which the wireless terminal 5700 decodes received signals which had been encoded prior to transmission by the base station. The transmitter module 5704, e.g., an OFDM transmitter, is coupled to a transmit antenna 5705 via which the wireless terminal 5700 transmits uplink signals to base stations. Uplink signals transmitted by the wireless terminal 5700 include: access signals, handoff signals, power control signals, timing control signals, DCCH channel segment signals, and uplink traffic channel segment signals. DCCH channel segment signals include initial DCCH report set signals and scheduled DCCH report set signals. In some embodiments, the same antenna is used for transmitter and receiver. Transmitter module 5704 includes an encoder 5716 via which the wireless terminal 5700 encodes at least some uplink signals prior to transmission.

User I/O devices 5708, e.g., microphone, keyboard, keypad, mouse, switches, camera, display, speaker, etc., are used to input data/information, output data/information, and control at least some functions of the wireless terminal, e.g., initiate a communications session. Memory 5710 includes routines 5718 and data/information 5720. The processor 5706, e.g., a CPU, executes the routines 5718 and uses the data/information 5720 in memory 5710 to control the operation of the wireless terminal 5700 and implement methods.

Routines 5718 include a communications routine 5722 and wireless terminal control routines 5724. The communications routine 5722 implements the various communications protocols used by the wireless terminal 5700. The wireless terminal control routines 5724 control operation of the wireless terminal 5700 including controlling operation of the receiver module 5702, transmitter module 5704 and user I/O devices 5708. Wireless terminal control routines 5724 include a report transmission control module 5726, an initial report generation module 5728, a scheduled report generation module 5730, and a timing control module 5732. The report transmission control module 5726 includes a handoff detection module 5734. The initial report generation module 5728 includes a report size set determination sub-module 5736.

Report transmission control module controls the wireless terminal 5700 to transmit an initial information report set following the transition by said wireless terminal from a first mode of operation to a second mode of operation and to transmit scheduled reports according to an uplink reporting schedule following transmission of said initial report set. In some embodiments the first mode of operation is one of a sleep state and a hold state and the second mode of operation is an ON state, e.g., an On state in which the wireless terminal is permitted to transmit user data. In various embodiments, in the second mode, e.g., ON state, the wireless terminal has a dedicated uplink reporting channel for reporting information including requests for uplink traffic channel resources which can be used to transmit user data. In various embodiments, in the first mode, e.g., sleep state or Hold state, the wireless terminal does not have a dedicated uplink reporting channel for reporting information including requests for uplink traffic channel resources which can be used to transmit user data.

The initial report generation module 5728, which is responsive to the report transmission control module 5726, generates an initial information report set as a function of a point in time with respect to an uplink transmission schedule at which said initial report set is to be transmitted. Scheduled report generation module 5730 generates scheduled report information sets to be transmitted following said initial information report. The timing control module 5732 correlates the uplink reporting structure based on downlink signals received from the base station, e.g., as part of closed loop timing control. In some embodiments, the timing control module 5732 is implemented, either partially or entirely as a timing control circuit. The handoff detection module 5734 detects a handoff from a first access node attachment point to a second access node attachment point and controls the wireless terminal to generate an initial information report set following certain types of identified handoffs, the generated initial information report set to be transmitted to the second access node attachment point. The certain types of identified handoffs include, in some embodiments, handoffs in which the wireless terminal transitions though an access state of operation with respect to the second access node attachment point before going to an On state with respect to the second access node. For example, the first and access node attachment points may correspond to different access nodes located in different cells which are not timing synchronized with respect to one another and the wireless terminal needs to go through the access state to achieve timing synchronization with respect to the second access node.

The handoff detection module 5734 controls the wireless terminal to forgo the generation and transmission of an initial information report following a handoff from a first access node attachment point to a second access node attachment point, under certain other types of handoffs, and to proceed directly into transmitting scheduled report information sets. For example, the first and second access node attachment points may be timing synchronized and correspond to the same access node, e.g., different adjacent sectors and/or tone blocks, and the certain other type of handoff is, e.g., a handoff which involves a transition from an ON state with respect to the first attachment point to an On state with respect to the second attachment point without having to transition through an access state.

Report set size determination sub-module 5736 determines an initial report set size as a function of the point in time with respect to the uplink transmission schedule at which said initial report is to be transmitted. For example, an initial report information set size is, in some embodiments, one of a plurality of set sizes, e.g., corresponding to one, two three, four or five DCCH segments, depending upon where in the uplink timing structure the initial report transmission is to be started, e.g., the point within a superslot. In some embodiments, the types of reports included in the initial report set is a function of where in the uplink timing structure the initial report transmission is to be started, e.g., depending upon the superslot location within a beaconslot.

Data/information 5720 includes user/device/session/resource information 5738, system data/information 5740, base station identification information 5742, terminal identification information 5744, timing control information 5746, current state of operation information 5748, DCCH channel information 5750, initial report time information 5752, determined initial report size information 5754, initial report control information 5756, generated initial report information set 5758, generated scheduled information report information sets 5760, handoff information 5762, uplink traffic request information 5764, and user data 5766. The initial report control information includes size information 5768 and time information 5770.

User/device/session/resource information 5738 includes information user identification information, e.g., user log-in IDs, passwords and user priority information, device information, e.g., device identification information and device characteristic parameters, session information, e.g., information pertaining to peers, e.g., other WTs in communications sessions with WT 5700, communications session information such as session keys, addressing and/or routing information, and resource information, e.g., uplink and/or downlink air link segments and/or identifiers allocated to the WT 5700.

System data/information 5740 includes a plurality of sets of base station information (base station 1 data/information 5772, . . . , base station M data/information 5774), recurring uplink reporting structure information 5780, and initial DCCH report information 5790. Base station 1 data/information 5772 includes downlink timing/frequency structure information 5776 and uplink timing/frequency structure information 5778. Downlink timing/frequency structure information 5776 includes downlink logical tone structure identifying various channels and segments, e.g., assignment, beacon, pilot, downlink traffic channel, etc., in a repetitive downlink structure and identifying timing, e.g., OFDM symbol time duration, indexing, groupings of OFDM symbol times, e.g., into slots, superslots, beaconslots, ultraslots, etc. Information 5776 also includes base station identification information, e.g., cell, sector, and carrier/tone block identification information. Information 5776 also includes downlink tone hopping information used to map logical tones to physical tones. Uplink timing/frequency structure information 5778 includes uplink logical tone structure identifying various channels and segments, e.g., access, assignment, power control channels, timing control channels, dedicated control channel (DCCH), uplink traffic channel, etc., in a repetitive uplink structure and identifying timing, e.g., OFDM symbol time duration, indexing, groupings of OFDM symbol times, e.g., into halfslots, slots, superslots, beaconslots, ultraslots, etc., as well as information correlating the downlink to uplink timing BS1, e.g., a timing offset between the uplink and downlink repetitive timing structures at the base station. Information 5778 also includes uplink tone hopping information used to map logical tones to physical tones.

Recurring uplink reporting structure information 5780 includes DCCH reports' format information 5782, and DCCH report sets information 5784. DCCH report sets information 5784 includes sets information 5786 and time information 5788. For example, the recurring uplink reporting structure information 5780 includes, in some embodiments, information identifying a recurring pattern of a fixed number of indexed DCCH segments, e.g., 40 indexed DCCH segments. Each of the indexed DCCH segments includes one of more types of DCCH reports, e.g., uplink traffic channel request reports, interference reports such as beacon ratio reports, different SNR reports, etc. The format of each of the different types of reports is identified in DCCH reports' format information 5782, e.g., for each type of report associating a fixed number of information bits with different potential bit patterns and interpretations of information conveyed by the corresponding bit pattern. DCCH report sets information 5784 identifies different grouping of reports associated with different indexed segments in the recurring DCCH reporting structure. Sets information 5786 identifies for each indexed DCCH segment identified by a corresponding time information entry 5788 a set of reports communicated in the segment and the order of those reports in the segment. For example in one exemplary embodiment, an exemplary DCCH segment with index value=6 includes 5 bit uplink transmission power backoff report and a 1 bit uplink traffic channel segment request report, while a DCCH segment with an index value=32 includes a 3 bit downlink difference signal to noise ratio report and a 3 bit uplink traffic channel request report. (See FIG. 10.)

Initial DCCH report information 5790 includes format information 5792 and report set information 5794. The format information 5792 includes information indicating the format of initial reports sets to be transmitted. In some embodiments, the formats of the initial reports, groupings, and/or number of initial reports to be transmitted in an initial report set depend on the time at which the initial report set is to be transmitted, e.g., with respect to a recurring uplink timing structure. Report set information 5794 includes information identifying various initial reports sets, e.g., number of reports, types of reports, and ordered grouping of reports, e.g., associated with DCCH segments to be communicated in the initial report.

Base station identification information 5742 includes information identifying the base station attachment point being used by the wireless terminal. Base station identification information 5742 includes physical attachment point identifiers, e.g., cell, sector and carrier/tone block identifiers associated with the base station attachment point. In some embodiments, at least some of the base station identifier information is communicated via beacon signals. Base station identification information 5742 also includes base station address information. Terminal identification information 5744 includes base station assigned identifiers associated with the wireless terminal, e.g., a registered user identifier and a On state identifier, the On state identifier being associated with a logical DCCH tone to be used by the wireless terminal. Timing control information 5746 includes received downlink signals from the base station used by the timing control module 5732 for correlating the uplink reporting structure, at least some of the received downlink timing control signals being used for closed loop timing control. Timing control information 5746 also includes information identifying the current timing with respect to repetitive uplink and downlink timing structures, e.g., an OFDM symbol transmission time period with respect to the structures. Current state of operation information 5748 includes information identifying the wireless terminal's current state of operation, e.g., sleep, hold, ON. Current state of operation information 5748 also includes information identifying when a WT is in a full-tone DCCH mode of operation or in a split-tone mode of DCCH operation, in an access process, or in the process of a handoff. In addition, current state of operation information 5748 includes, information identifying whether a wireless terminal is communicating an initial DCCH report set or communicating recurring reporting structure information DCCH report sets, when the wireless terminal is assigned a logical DCCH channel tone to use. Initial report time information 5752 includes information identifying the point in time with respect to an uplink transmission schedule at which the initial DCCH report set is to be transmitted. Determined initial report size information 5754 is an output of the report set size determination sub-module 5736. Initial report control information 5756 includes information used by the initial report generation module 5728 to control the content of an initial report set. Initial report control information 5756 includes size information 5768 and time information 5770. Generated initial report information set 5758 is an initial report set generated by wireless terminal initial report generation module 5728 using the data/information 5720 including initial DCCH report structure information 5790, initial report control information 5756, and information to be included in the reports of the initial report such as, e.g., uplink traffic channel request information 5764, SNR information, and measured interference information. Generated scheduled report information sets 5760 includes generated scheduled information report sets, e.g., each set corresponding to a scheduled DCCH segment to be used by the wireless terminal. The generated scheduled report information sets 5760 being generated by the scheduled report generation module 5730 using the data/information 5720 including the recurring uplink reporting structure information 5780, and information to be included in the reports of the initial report such as, e.g., uplink traffic channel request information 5764, SNR information, and measured interference information. Uplink traffic request information 5764 includes information pertaining to requests for uplink traffic channel segment resources, e.g., number of frames of uplink user data to be communicated corresponding to different request group queues. User data 5766 includes, voice data, audio data, image data, text data, file data to be communicated via uplink traffic channel segments and/or received via downlink traffic channel segments.

FIG. 58 is a drawing of an exemplary base station 5800, e.g., access node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary base station 5800 may be any of the base stations of the exemplary system of FIG. 1. Exemplary base station 5800 includes a receiver module 5802, a transmitter module 5804, a processor 5806, an I/O interface 5808, and a memory 5810 coupled together via a bus 5812 over which the various elements interchange data and information.

Receiver module 5802, e.g., an OFDM receiver, receives uplink signals from a plurality of wireless terminals via receive antenna 5803. The uplink signals include dedicated control channel report information sets from wireless terminals, access signals, requests for mode changes, and uplink traffic channel segment signals. Receiver module 5802 includes a decoder module 5814 for decoding uplink signals which were encoded prior to transmission by the wireless terminals.

Transmitter module 5804, e.g., an OFDM transmitter, transmits downlink signals to wireless terminals via transmit antenna 5805. Transmitted downlink signals include registration signals, DCCH control signals, traffic channel assignment signals, and downlink traffic channel signals.

I/O interface 5808 provides an interface for coupling the base station 5800 to other network nodes, e.g., other base stations, AAA server nodes, home agent nodes, routers, etc., and/or the Internet. I/O interface 5808 allows a wireless terminal using base station 5800 as its point of network attachment to communicate with peer nodes, e.g., other wireless terminals, in different cells, via a backhaul communication network.

Memory 5810 includes routines 5820 and data/information 5822. The processor 5806, e.g. a CPU, executes the routines 5820 and uses the data/information 5822 in memory 5810 to control the operation of the base station 5800 and implement methods. Routines 5820 include a communications routines 5824 and base station control routines 5826. The communications routines 5824 implement the various communications protocols used by the base station 5800. Base station control routines 5826 include a scheduler module 5828, a report set interpretation module 5830, an access module 5832, a handoff module 5834, and a registered wireless terminal state transition module 5836.

Scheduler module 5828 schedules uplink and/or downlink traffic channel segments to wireless terminals, e.g., to wireless terminals which are using the base station 5800 as their point of network attachment, are in an On state and currently have an assigned dedicated control channel either in split-tone mode or full-tone mode.

Report set interpretation module 5830, e.g., a DCCH report set interpretation module, includes an initial report set interpretation sub-module 5838 and a recurring reporting structure report set interpretation sub-module 5840. Report set interpretation module 5830 interprets each received DCCH report set in accordance with the initial DCCH report information 5850 or the recurring uplink reporting structure information 5848. Report set interpretation module 5830 is responsive to transitions by wireless terminals to the ON state. Report set interpretation module 5830 interprets as an initial information report set, a DCCH report information set received from a wireless terminal immediately after one of: a migration of the wireless terminal to an On state from a hold state with respect to the current connection, a migration of the wireless terminal to an On state from an access state with respect to the current connection, and a migration of the wireless terminal to an On state from an On state which existed with respect to another connection prior to a handoff to the base station. Report set interpretation module 5830 includes an initial report set interpretation sub-module 5838 and a recurring reporting structure report set interpretation sub-module 5840. Initial report set interpretation sub-module 5838 processes received information report sets, e.g., corresponding to a received DCCH segment, which have been determined to be an initial DCCH report set, using data/information 5822 including initial DCCH report information 5850, to obtain interpreted initial report set information. Recurring reporting structure report set interpretation sub-module 5840 processes received information report sets, e.g., corresponding to a received DCCH segment, which have been determined to be a recurring reporting structure DCCH report set, using data/information 5822 including recurring uplink reporting structure information 5848, to obtain interpreted recurring structure report set information.

Access module 5832 controls operations relating to wireless terminal access operations. For example, a wireless terminal transitions through the access mode to an On state achieving uplink timing synchronization with a base station attachment point and receiving a WT On state identifier associated with a logical DCCH channel tone in the uplink timing and frequency structure to be used to communicate uplink DCCH segment signals. Following this transition to the On state, the initial report set interpretation sub-module 5838 is activated to process DCCH segments for the remainder of a superslot, e.g., one, two, three, four, or five DCCH segments, then operation is transferred to the recurring reporting structure report set interpretation sub-module 5840 to process subsequent DCCH segments from the wireless terminal. The number of DCCH segments and/or the format used for those segments processed by module 5838 before transferring control to module 5840 is a function of the time at which the access occurs with respect to the recurring uplink DCCH reporting structure.

Handoff module 5834 controls operations pertaining to handoffs a wireless terminal from one attachment point to another attachment point. For example, a wireless terminal in an ON state of operation with a first base station attachment point may perform a handoff operation to base station 5800 to transition into an ON state with respect to a second base station attachment point, the second base station attachment point being a base station 5800 attachment point, and the handoff module 5834 activates the initial report set interpretation sub-module 5838.

Registered wireless terminal state transition module 5836 performs operations related to mode changes of wireless terminals which have registered with the base station. For example, a registered wireless terminal currently in a Hold state of operation in which the wireless terminal is precluded from transmitting uplink user data may transition to an On state of operation in which the WT is assigned an ON state identifier associated with a DCCH logical channel tone and in which the wireless terminal can receive uplink traffic channel segments which are to be used to communicate uplink user data. Registered WT state transition module 5836 activates initial report set interpretation sub-module 5838 in response to the mode transition from Hold to ON of the wireless terminal.

Base station 5800 manages a plurality of ON state wireless terminals. For a set of received DCCH segments, communicated from different wireless terminals, corresponding to the same time interval, the base station, at some times, processes some of the segments using the initial report set interpretation sub-module 5838 and some of the reports using the recurring reporting structure set interpretation sub-module 5840.

Data/information 5822 includes system data/information 5842, access signal information 5860, handoff signal information 5862, mode transition signaling information 5864, time information 5866, current DCCH logical tone implementation information 5868, received DCCH segments information 5870, base station identification information 5859, and WT data/information 5872.

System data/information 5842 includes downlink timing/frequency structure information 5844, uplink timing/frequency structure information 5846, recurring uplink reporting structure information 5848, and initial DCCH report information 5850. Recurring uplink reporting structure information 5848 includes DCCH reports' format information 5852 and DCCH report sets information 5854. DCCH report sets information 5854 includes sets information 5856 and time information 5858. Initial DCCH report information 5850 includes format information 5851 and report set information 5853.

Downlink timing/frequency structure information 5844 includes downlink logical tone structure identifying various channels and segments, e.g., assignment, beacon, pilot, downlink traffic channel, etc., in a repetitive downlink structure and identifying timing, e.g., OFDM symbol time duration, indexing, groupings of OFDM symbol times, e.g., into slots, superslots, beaconslots, ultraslots, etc. Information 5844 also includes base station identification information, e.g., cell, sector, and carrier/tone block identification information. Information 5844 also includes downlink tone hopping information used to map logical tones to physical tones. Uplink timing/frequency structure information 5846 includes uplink logical tone structure identifying various channels and segments, e.g., access, assignment, power control channels, power control channels, dedicated control channel (DCCH), uplink traffic channel, etc., in a repetitive uplink structure and identifying timing, e.g., OFDM symbol time duration, indexing, groupings of OFDM symbol times, e.g., into halfslots, slots, superslots, beaconslots, ultraslots, etc., as well as information correlating the downlink to uplink timing, e.g., a timing offset between the uplink and downlink repetitive timing structures at the base station. Information 5846 also includes uplink tone hopping information used to map logical tones to physical tones.

Recurring uplink reporting structure information 5848 includes DCCH reports' format information 5852, and DCCH report sets information 5848. DCCH report sets information 5854 includes sets information 5856 and time information 5858. For example, the recurring uplink reporting structure information 5848 includes, in some embodiments, information identifying a recurring pattern of a fixed number of indexed DCCH segments, e.g., 40 indexed DCCH segments. Each of the indexed DCCH segments includes one of more types of DCCH reports, e.g., uplink traffic channel request reports, interference reports such as beacon ratio reports, different SNR reports, etc. The format of each of the different types of reports is identified in DCCH reports' format information 5852, e.g., for each type of report associating a fixed number of information bits with different potential bit patterns and interpretations of information conveyed by the corresponding bit pattern. DCCH report sets information 5854 identifies different grouping of reports associated with different indexed segments in the recurring DCCH reporting structure. Sets information 5856 identifies for each indexed DCCH segment identified by a corresponding time information entry 5858 a set of reports communicated in the segment and the order of those reports in the segment. For example in one exemplary embodiment, an exemplary DCCH segment with index value=6 includes 5 bit uplink transmission power backoff report and a 1 bit uplink traffic channel segment request report, while a DCCH segment with an index value=32 includes a 3 bit downlink delta signal to node ratio report and a 3 bit uplink traffic channel request report. (See FIG. 10.)

Initial DCCH report information 5850 includes format information 5851 and report set information 5853. The format information 5851 includes information indicating the format of initial reports sets to be transmitted. In some embodiments, the formats of the initial reports, groupings, and/or number of initial reports to be transmitted in an initial report set depend on the time at which the initial report set is to be transmitted, e.g., with respect to a recurring uplink timing structure. Report set information 5853 includes information identifying various initial reports sets, e.g., number of reports, types of reports, and ordered grouping of reports, e.g., associated with DCCH segments to be communicated in the initial report set.

Base station identification information 5859 includes information identifying the base station attachment point being used by the wireless terminal. Base station identification information 5859 includes physical attachment point identifiers, e.g., cell, sector and carrier/tone block identifiers associated with the base station attachment point. In some embodiments, at least some of the base station identifier information is communicated via beacon signals. Base station identification information also includes base station address information. Access signal information 5860 includes access request signals received from wireless terminals, access response signals sent to wireless terminal, timing signals related to the access, and base station internal signaling to activate the initial report interpretation sub-module 5838 in response to a transition from the access state to the On state for a wireless terminal. Handoff signal information 5862 includes information pertaining to handoff operations including handoff signaling received from other base stations and base station internal signaling to activate the initial report interpretation sub-module 5838 in response to a transition from a WT ON state of another connection to a WT On state with respect to a base station 5800 attachment point connection. Mode transitioning signaling information 5864 includes signals between a currently registered wireless terminal and base station 5800 regarding state changes, e.g., a change from hold state to On state, and base station internal signaling to activate the initial report set interpretation sub-module 5838 in response to state transitions, e.g., Hold to On. Registered WT state transition module 5836 also deactivates recurring reporting structure report set interpretation sub-module 5840 with respect to a wireless terminal in response to some state changes, e.g., a wireless terminal transition from ON state to one of Hold state, sleep state, or Off state.

Time information 5866 includes current time information, e.g., an indexed OFDM symbol time period within a recurring uplink timing structure being used by the base station. Current DCCH logical tone implementation information 5868 includes information identifying which of the base stations logical DCCH tones are currently in a full-tone DCCH mode and which are in a split-tone DCCH mode. Received DCCH segments information 5860 includes information from received DCCH segments corresponding to a plurality of WT users currently assigned logical DCCH tones.

WT data/information 5872 includes a plurality of sets of wireless terminal information (WT 1 data/information 5874, . . . , WT N data/information 5876). WT 1 data/information 5874 includes identification information 5886, mode information 5888, received DCCH information 5880, processed DCCH information 5882, and user data 5884. Received DCCH information 5880 includes initial received report set information 5892 and recurring report structure received report sets information 5894. Processed DCCH information 5882 includes interpreted initial report set information 5896 and interpreted recurring structure report sets information 5898. Identification information 5886 includes a base station assigned wireless terminal registration identifier, addressing information associated with WT1. At times, the identification information 5886 includes a WT On state identifier, the On state identifier associated with a logical DCCH channel tone to be used by the wireless terminal to communicate DCCH segment signals. Mode information 5888 includes information identifying the current state of WT1, e.g., sleep state, Hold state, access state, On state, in the process of a handoff, etc., and information further qualifying the ON state, e.g., full tone DCCH On or split-tone DCCH On. User data 5884 includes uplink and/or downlink traffic channel segment information, e.g., voice data, audio data, image data, text data, file data, etc., to be received from/communicated to a peer node of WT1 in a communications session with WT1.

Initial received report set information 5892 includes a set of information corresponding to a WT1 DCCH segment which was communicated using format in accordance with an initial reporting information 5850 and is interpreted by module 5838 recovering interpreted initial report information set information 5896. Recurring report structure received report sets information 5894 includes a set of information corresponding to a WT1 DCCH segment which was communicated using format in accordance with recurring uplink reporting structure information 5848 and is interpreted by module 5840 recovering a interpreted recurring report information set information 5898.

FIG. 59 comprising the combination of FIG. 59A, FIG. 59B and FIG. 59C is a flowchart 5900 of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal in accordance with various embodiments. The exemplary method starts in step 5901 where the wireless terminal is powered up and initialized. Operation proceeds from step 5901 to steps 5902 and step 5904. In step 5902, the wireless terminal tracks, on an ongoing basis, current time in relation to an uplink recurring DCCH reporting schedule and in relation to uplink tone hopping information. Time information 5906 is output from step 5902 to be used in other steps of the method.

In step 5904, the wireless terminal receives a base station On state identifier associated with a DCCH logical tone in an uplink channel structure of an access node serving as the wireless terminal's point of attachment. Operation proceeds from step 5904 to step 5908. In step 5908, the wireless terminal receives information identifying whether the wireless terminal should be in a fall-tone DCCH mode of operation or a split-tone DCCH mode of operation, said information indicating split-tone DCCH mode of operation also identifying one among a plurality of sets of DCCH segments associated with the DCCH logical tone. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, when in full-tone DCCH mode, a wireless terminal is allocated a single logical DCCH tone corresponds to a recurring set of 40 indexed DCCH segments in an uplink channel structure, but while in a split-tone mode of operation, a wireless terminal is allocated a single logical DCCH tone which is time shared such that the wireless terminal receives a set of 13 indexed segments in a recurring uplink channel structure and two other wireless terminals may each be allocated a different set of 13 segments in the uplink channel structure. In some embodiments the information communicated in steps 5904 and 5908 are communicated in the same message. Operation proceeds from step 5908 to step 5910.

In step 5910, the wireless terminal proceeds to step 5912 if the wireless terminal has determined that it in full-tone DCCH mode, while operation proceeds to step 5914 if the wireless terminal has determined that it in split-tone DCCH mode.

In step 5912, the wireless terminal identifies DCCH communication segments allocated to the wireless terminal using time information 5906 and the identified logical DCCH tone. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, for each beacon slot, the wireless terminal identifies a set of 40 indexed DCCH segments corresponding to assigned logical DCCH tone. Operation proceeds from step 5912 to step 5916, for each identified communications segment. In step 5916, the wireless terminal using time information 5906, the indexed value of the DCCH segment within the recurring structure, and stored information associating sets of report types with each indexed segment, identifies a set of report types to be communicated in the DCCH communications segment. Operation proceeds from step 5916 via connecting node A 5920 to step 5924.

In step 5924, the wireless terminal checks as to whether any of report types identified in step 5916 include a flexible report. If any of the identified report types indicate a flexible report, then operation proceeds from step 5924 to step 5928; otherwise operation proceeds from step 5924 to step 5926.

In step 5926, the wireless terminal, for each fixed type information report of the segment, maps the information to be conveyed to a fixed number of information bits corresponding to the report size, said fixed type of information reports being dictated by a reporting schedule. Operation proceeds from step 5926 to step 5942.

In step 5928, the wireless terminal selects which type of report from among a plurality of fixed type information report types to include as a flexible report body. Step 5928 includes sub-step 5930. In sub-step 5930, the wireless terminal performs the selection as a function of a report prioritization operation. Sub-step 5930 includes sub-step 5932 and 5934. In sub-step 5932, the wireless terminal considers the amount of uplink data queued for communication to the access node, e.g., the backlog in a plurality of request queues, and at least one signal interference measurement, e.g., a beacon ratio report. In sub-step 5934, the wireless terminal determines an amount of change in information previously reported in at least one report, e.g., a measured change in a downlink saturation level of self-noise SNR report. Operation proceeds from step 5928 to step 5936.

In step 5936, the wireless terminal codes the type of flexible body report into a type identifier, e.g., a two bit flexible report body identifier. Operation proceeds from step 5936 to step 5938. In step 5938, the wireless terminal maps the information to be conveyed in the flexible report body in accordance with the selected report type to a number of information bits corresponding to the flexible report body size. Operation proceeds from step 5938 to either step 5940 or step 5942. Step 5942 is an optional step, included in some embodiments. In step 5940, for each fixed type information report of the segment in addition to the flexible report, map the information to be conveyed to a fixed number of information bits corresponding to the report size. Operation proceeds from step 5940 to step 5942. For example, in some embodiments, a DCCH segment including a flexible report, when in the full-tone mode utilizes the full number of information bits communicated by the segment for itself, e.g., the segment conveys 6 information bits, 2 bits are used for identifying the type of report and 4 bits used for conveying the body of the report. In such an embodiment, step 5940 is not performed. In some other embodiments, the total number of bits conveyed by a DCCH segment in the full-tone DCCH mode is greater than the number of bits represented by the flexible report and step 5940 is included to utilize the remaining information bits of the segment. For example, the segment conveys a total of 7 information bits 6 of which are utilized by the flexible report and 1 is used for a fixed one information bit uplink traffic request report.

In step 5942, the wireless terminal performs coding and modulation operations to generate a set of modulation symbols to represent the one or more reports to be communicated in the DCCH segment. Operation proceeds from step 5942 to step 5944. In step 5944, the wireless terminal, for each modulation symbol of the set of generated modulation symbols determines, using time information 5906 and tone hopping information, the physical tone to be used to convey the modulation symbol. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, each DCCH segment corresponds to 21 OFDM tone-symbols each tone symbol being used to convey one QPSK modulation symbol, each of the 21 OFDM tone-symbols corresponding to the same logical DCCH tone; however due to uplink tone hopping, 7 OFDM tone symbols in a first set of seven successive OFDM symbol time periods corresponding to a first physical tone, a second set of seven OFDM tone-symbols in a second set of seven successive OFDM symbol time periods corresponding to a second physical tone, and a third set of seven successive OFDM symbol time periods corresponding to a third physical tone, the first second and third physical tones being different. Operation proceeds from step 5944 to step 5946. In step 5946, the wireless terminal transmits each modulation symbol of the DCCH segment using the determined corresponding physical tone.

Returning to step 5914, in step 5914, the wireless terminal identifies DCCH communication segments allocated to the wireless terminal using time information 5906, the identified logical DCCH tone, and the information identifying the one among the plurality of sets of DCCH segments. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, for each beacon slot, the wireless terminal identifies a set of 13 indexed DCCH segments corresponding to assigned logical DCCH tone. Operation proceeds from step 5914 to step 5918, for each identified DCCH communications segment. In step 5918, the wireless terminal using time information 5906, the indexed value of the DCCH segment within the recurring structure, and stored information associating sets of report types with each indexed segment, identifies a set of report types to be communicated in the DCCH communications segment. Operation proceeds form step 5916 via connecting node B 5922 to step 5948.

In step 5948, the wireless terminal checks as to whether any of report types identified in step 5918 include a flexible report. If any of the identified report types indicate a flexible report, then operation proceeds from step 5948 to step 5952; otherwise operation proceeds from step 5948 to step 5950.

In step 5950, the wireless terminal, for each fixed type information report of the segment, maps the information to be conveyed to a fixed number of information bits corresponding to the report size, said fixed type of information reports being dictated by a reporting schedule. Operation proceeds from step 5950 to step 5966.

In step 5952, the wireless terminal selects which type of report from among a plurality of fixed type information report types to include as a flexible report body. Step 5952 includes sub-step 5954. In sub-step 5954, the wireless terminal performs the selection as a function of a report prioritization operation. Sub-step 5954 includes sub-step 5956 and 5958. In sub-step 5956, the wireless terminal considers the amount of uplink data queued for communication to the access node, e.g., the backlog in a plurality of request queues, and at least one signal interference measurement, e.g., a beacon ratio report. In sub-step 5958, the wireless terminal determines an amount of change in information previously reported in at least one report, e.g., a measured change in a downlink saturation level of self-noise SNR report. Operation proceeds from step 5952 to step 5960.

In step 5960, the wireless terminal codes the type of flexible body report into a type identifier, e.g., a single bit flexible report body identifier. Operation proceeds from step 5960 to step 5962. In step 5962, the wireless terminal maps the information to be conveyed in the flexible report body in accordance with the selected report type to a number of information bits corresponding to the flexible report body size. Operation proceeds from step 5962 to either step 5964 or step 5966. Step 5964 is an optional step, included in some embodiments. In step 5964, for each fixed type information report of the segment in addition to the flexible report, map the information to be conveyed to a fixed number of information bits corresponding to the report size. Operation proceeds from step 5964 to step 5966. For example, in some embodiments, a DCCH segment including a flexible report, when in the split-tone mode utilizes the full number of information bits communicated by the segment for itself, and in such an embodiment, step 5964 is not performed. In some other embodiments, the total number of bits conveyed by a DCCH segment in the split-tone DCCH mode is greater than the number of bits represented by the flexible report and step 5940 is included to utilize the remaining information bits of the segment. For example, the segment conveys a total of 8 information bits 6 of which are utilized by the flexible report and 1 information bit is used for a fixed one information bit uplink traffic request report, and 1 information bit is used for another predetermined report type. In some embodiments, the size of the body of the flexible report varies corresponding to different selections of the type of report to be conveyed by the flexible report, e.g., a 4 bit uplink traffic channel request or a five bit uplink transmission power backoff report, and the remainder of the available bits in the segment can be allocated to predetermined fixed report types, e.g., 1 or 2 bits.

In step 5966, the wireless terminal performs coding and modulation operations to generate a set of modulation symbols to represent the one or more reports to be communicated in the DCCH segment. Operation proceeds from step 5966 to step 5968. In step 5968, the wireless terminal, for each modulation symbol of the set of generated modulation symbols determines, using time information 5906 and tone hopping information, the physical tone to be used to convey the modulation symbol. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, each DCCH segment corresponds to 21 OFDM tone-symbols each tone symbol being used to convey one QPSK modulation symbol, each of the 21 OFDM tone-symbols corresponding to the same logical DCCH tone; however due to uplink tone hopping, 7 OFDM tone symbols in a first set of seven successive OFDM symbol time periods corresponding to a first physical tone, a second set of seven OFDM tone-symbols in a second set of seven successive OFDM symbol time periods corresponding to a second physical tone, and a third set of seven successive OFDM symbol time periods corresponding to a third physical tone, the first second and third physical tones being determined in accordance with tone hopping information and may be different. Operation proceeds from step 5968 to step 5970. In step 5970, the wireless terminal transmits each modulation symbol of the DCCH segment using the determined corresponding physical tone.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart 6000 of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal to provide transmission power information to a base station in accordance with various embodiments. Operation starts in step 6002. For example, the wireless terminal may have been previously powered on, established a connection with a base station, have transitioned in the ON state of operation, and been assigned dedicated control channel segments to use in either a full-tone or split tone mode of DCCH operation. The full-tone DCCH mode of operation is in some embodiments, a mode in which the wireless tone is dedicated a single logical tone channel used for DCCH segments which is not shared with other wireless terminal, while the split tone-DCCH mode of operation is, in some embodiments, a mode in which the wireless terminal is dedicated a portion of a single logical DCCH tone channel which can be allocated to be used on a time shared with another wireless terminal or terminals. Operation proceeds from start step 6002 to step 6004.

In step 6004, the wireless terminal generates a power report indicating a ratio of a maximum transmit power of the wireless terminal to the transmit power of a reference signal having a power level known to the wireless terminal at a point in time corresponding to the power report. In some embodiments the power report is a backoff report, e.g., a wireless terminal transmission power backoff report, indicating a dB value. In some embodiments, the maximum transmission power value depends on a power output capability of the wireless terminal. In some embodiments, the maximum transmission power is specified by a government regulation limiting the maximum output power level of the wireless terminal. In some embodiments, the reference signal is controlled by the wireless terminal based upon at least one closed loop power level control signal received from a base station. In some embodiment, the reference signal is a control information signal transmitted over a dedicated control channel to the base station. The reference signal, in some embodiments, is measured for received power level by the base station to which it is transmitted. In various embodiments, the dedicated control channel is a single tone control channel which corresponds to a single logical tone dedicated to the wireless terminal for use in transmitting control information. In various embodiments, the power report is a power report corresponding to a single instant in time. In some embodiments, the known reference signal is a signal transmitted on the same channel as the power report, e.g., the same DCCH channel. In various embodiments, the point in time to which a generated power report corresponds has a known offset from a start of a communication segment, e.g., a DCCH segment, in which said power report is to be transmitted. Step 6004 includes sub-step 6006, sub-step 6008, sub-step 6010, and sub-step 6012.

In sub-step 6006, the wireless terminal performs a subtraction operation including subtracting a per-tone transmission power of an uplink dedicated control channel in dBm from a maximum transmission power of wireless terminal in dBm. Operation proceeds from sub-step 6006 to sub-step 6008. In sub-step 6008, the wireless terminal proceeds to different sub-steps depending upon whether the wireless terminal is in a full-tone DCCH mode of operation or a split-tone DCCH mode of operation. If the wireless terminal is in full-tone DCCH mode of operation, operation proceeds from sub-step 6008 to sub-step 6010. If the wireless terminal is in split-tone DCCH mode of operation, operation proceeds from sub-step 6008 to sub-step 6012. In sub-step 6010, the wireless terminal generates a power report in accordance with a first format, e.g., a 5 information bit power report. For example the result of sub-step 6006 is compared to a plurality of different levels, each level corresponding to a different 5 bit pattern, the level closet to the result of sub-step 6006 is selected for the report, and the bit pattern corresponding to that level is used for the report. In one exemplary embodiment, the levels range from 6.5 dBs to 40 dBs. (See FIG. 26.) In sub-step 6012 the wireless terminal generates a power report in accordance with a second format, e.g., a 4 information bit power report. For example the result of sub-step 6006 is compared to a plurality of different levels, each level corresponding to a different 4 bit pattern, the level closet to the result of sub-step 6006 is selected for the report, and the bit pattern corresponding to that level is used for the report. In one exemplary embodiment, the levels range from 6 dBs to 36 dBs. (See FIG. 35.) Operation proceeds from step 6004 to step 6014.

In step 6014, the wireless terminal is operated to transmit the generated power report to a base station. Step 6014 includes sub-steps 6016, 6018, 6020, 6022, and 6028. In sub-step 6016, the wireless terminal proceeds to different sub-steps depending upon whether the wireless terminal is in a full-tone DCCH mode of operation or a split-tone DCCH mode of operation. If the wireless terminal is in full-tone DCCH mode of operation, operation proceeds from sub-step 6016 to sub-step 6018. If the wireless terminal is in split-tone DCCH mode of operation, operation proceeds from sub-step 6016 to sub-step 6020.

In sub-step 6018, the wireless terminal combines the generated power report with additional information bit(s), e.g., 1 additional information bit, and jointly codes the set of combined information bits, e.g., set of 6 information bits, to generate a set of modulation symbols for a DCCH segment, e.g., a set of 21 modulation symbols. For example, the 1 additional information bit is, in some embodiments, a single information bit uplink traffic channel resource request report. In sub-step 6020, the wireless terminal combines the generated power report with additional information bit(s), e.g., 4 additional information bits, and jointly codes the set of combined information bits, e.g., set of 8 information bits, to generate a set of modulation symbols for a DCCH segment, e.g., a set of 21 modulation symbols. For example, the set of 4 additional information bit is, in some embodiments, a 4 information bit uplink traffic channel resource request report. Operation proceeds from sub-step 6018 or sub-step 6020 to sub-step 6022.

In sub-step 6022, the wireless terminal determines the single OFDM tone used during each of a plurality of consecutive OFDM symbol transmission time periods for the DCCH segment. Sub-step 6022 includes sub-step 6024 and sub-step 6026. In sub-step 6024, the wireless terminal determines the logical DCCH channel tone assigned to the wireless terminal, and in sub-step 6026, the wireless terminal determines a physical tone to which the logical DCCH channel tone corresponds at different points in time based on tone hopping information. For example, in some embodiments, an exemplary DCCH segment corresponds to a single DCCH channel logical tone and the DCCH segment includes 21 OFDM tone-symbols, one OFDM tone-symbol for each of the 21 consecutive OFDM symbol transmission time intervals, the same physical tone used for a first set of seven, a second physical tone used for a second set of seven, and a third physical tone used for a third set of seven. Operation proceeds from sub-step 6022 to sub-step 6028. In sub-step 6028, the wireless terminal, for each OFDM symbol transmission time period, corresponding to the DCCH segment, transmits a modulation symbol from the set of generated modulation symbols using the determined physical tone for that point in time.

Operation proceeds from step 6014 to step 6004, where the wireless terminal proceeds to generate another power report. In some embodiments, the power report is transmitted twice during each recurring cycle of a dedicated control channel reporting structure used to control transmission of control information by the wireless terminal. In some embodiments, the power report is transmitted, on average at least once every 500 OFDM symbol transmission time periods but on average at intervals spaced apart by at least 200 symbol transmission time intervals.

Various features of an exemplary embodiment will now be described. The wireless terminal (WT) uses an ULRQST1, ULRQST3 or ULRQST4 to report the status of the MAC frame queues at the WT transmitter.

The WT transmitter maintains MAC frame queues, which buffers the MAC frames to be transmitted over the link. The MAC frames are converted from the LLC frames, which are constructed from packets of upper layer protocols. An uplink user data packet belongs to one of 4 request groups. A packet is associated with a particular request group. If the packet belongs to one request group, then each of the MAC frames of that packet also belong to that request group.

The WT reports the number of MAC frames in the 4 request groups that the WT may intend to transmit. In the ARQ protocol, those MAC frames are marked as “new” or “to be retransmitted”.

The WT maintains a vector of four elements N[0:3]: for k=0:3, N[k] represents the number of MAC frames that the WT intends to transmit in request group k. The WT reports the information about N[0:3] to the base station sector (BSS) so that the BSS can utilize the information in an uplink (UL) scheduling algorithm to determine the assignment of uplink traffic channel (UL.TCH) segments.

In an exemplary embodiment, the WT uses the single bit uplink traffic channel request report (ULRQST1) to report N[0]+N[1] according to table 6100 of FIG. 61. Table 6100 is an exemplary format for an ULRQST1 report. First column 6102 indicates the two possible bit patterns that may be conveyed while second column 6104 indicates the meaning of each bit pattern. If the bit pattern is 0, that indicates that there are no MAC frames that the WT intends to transmit in either request group 0 or request group 1. If the bit pattern is 1, that indicates that the WT has at least one MAC frame in request group 0 or request group 1 that the WT intends to communicate.

At a given time, the WT uses only one request dictionary. When the WT just enters the ACTIVE state, the WT uses the default request dictionary. To change the request dictionary, the WT and the BSS uses an upper layer configuration protocol. When the WT migrates from the ON state to the HOLD state, the WT keeps the last request dictionary used in the ON state so that when the WT migrates from the HOLD state to the ON state later, the WT continues to use the same request dictionary until the request dictionary is explicitly changed. However, if the WT leaves the ACTIVE state, then the memory of the last request dictionary used is cleared.

To determine an ULRQST3 or ULRQST4, the WT first calculates the following two parameters, y and z, and then use one of the following dictionaries. Denote by x the value (in dB) of the most recent 5 bit uplink transmission power backoff report (ULTXBKF5) report, and by b₀ the value in (dB) of the most recent generic 4 bit downlink beacon ratio report (DLBNR4). The WT further determines an adjusted generic DLBNR4 report value b as follows: b=b₀−ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset, where minus is defined in the dB sense. The base station sector broadcasts the value of ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset in a downlink broadcast channel. The WT uses ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset equal to 0 dB until the WT receives the value from the broadcast channel.

FIG. 62 is an exemplary table 6200 used to calculate control parameters y and z. First column 6202 lists a condition; second column 6204 lists the corresponding value of output control parameter y; third column 6206 lists the corresponding value of output control parameter z. Given x and b, the WT determines y and z as those from the first row in Table 6200 of FIG. 62 for which the condition in the first column is satisfied. For example, if x=17 and b=3, then z=min(4,N_(max)) and y=1. Denote R_(max) the highest rate option that the WT can support, and N_(max) the number of MAC frames of that highest rate option.

The WT uses an ULRQST3 or ULRQST4 to report the actual N[0:3] of the MAC frame queues according to a request dictionary. A request dictionary is identified by a request dictionary (RD) reference number.

The exemplary request dictionaries show that any ULRQST4 or ULRQST3 report may not completely include the actual N[0:3]. A report is in effect a quantized version of the actual N[0:3]. A general guideline is that the WT should send a report to minimize the discrepancy between the reported and the actual MAC frames queues first for request groups 0 and 1, and then for request group 2, and finally for request group 3. However, the WT has the flexibility of determining a report to benefit the WT the most. For example, when the WT is using the request dictionary 2, the WT may use an ULRQST4 to report N[1]+N[3] and use an ULRQST3 to report N[2]. In addition, if a report is directly related to a subset of request groups according to the request dictionary, it does not automatically imply that the MAC frame queues of a remaining request group are empty. For example, if a report means N[2]=1, then it may not automatically imply that N[0]=0, N[1]=0, or N[3]=0.

Table 6300 of FIG. 63 and Table 6400 of FIG. 64 define an exemplary request dictionary with the RD reference number equal to 0. Define d₁₂₃=ceil(((N[1]+N[2]+N[3]−N_(123,min))/(y*g)),whereN_(123,min)and g are variables determined by the most recent ULRQST4 report as per Table 6300. FIG. 63 is a table 6300 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary first request dictionary (RD reference number=0). In some embodiments, the request dictionary with reference number=0 is the default request dictionary. First column 6302 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 6304 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. FIG. 64 is a table 6400 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary first request dictionary (RD reference number=0). In some embodiments, the request dictionary with reference number=0 is the default request dictionary. First column 6402 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 6404 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern.

Table 6500 of FIG. 65 and Table 6600 of FIG. 66 define an exemplary request dictionary with the RD reference number equal to 1. FIG. 65 is a table 6500 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary second request dictionary (RD reference number=1). First column 6502 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 6504 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. FIG. 66 is a table 6600 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary second request dictionary (RD reference number=1). First column 6602 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 6604 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern.

Table 6700 of FIG. 67 and Table 6800 of FIG. 68 define an exemplary request dictionary with the RD reference number equal to 2. FIG. 67 is a table 6700 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary third request dictionary (RD reference number=2). First column 6702 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 6704 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. FIG. 68 is a table 6800 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary third request dictionary (RD reference number=2). First column 6802 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 6804 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern.

Table 6900 of FIG. 69 and Table 7000 of FIG. 70 define an exemplary request dictionary with the RD reference number equal to 3. FIG. 69 is a table 6900 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 16 bit patterns for a four bit uplink request, ULRQST4, corresponding to an exemplary fourth request dictionary (RD reference number=3). First column 6902 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 6904 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern. FIG. 70 is a table 7000 identifying bit format and interpretations associated with each of 8 bit patterns for a three bit uplink request, ULRQST3, corresponding to an exemplary fourth request dictionary (RD reference number=3). First column 7002 identifies the bit pattern and bit ordering, most significant bit to least significant bit. Second column 7004 identifies the interpretation associated with each bit pattern.

FIG. 71 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal 7100, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary WT 7100 may be any of the wireless terminals of the exemplary system of FIG. 1. Exemplary WT 7100 may be any of the WTs (136, 138, 144, 146, 152, 154, 168, 170, 172, 174, 176, 178) of exemplary system 100 of FIG. 1. Exemplary wireless terminal 7100 includes a receiver module 7102, a transmitter module 7104, a processor 7106, user I/O devices 7108, and a memory 7110 coupled together via a bus 7112 via which the various elements may interchange data and information.

Memory 7110 includes routines 7118 and data/information 7120. The processor 7106, e.g., a CPU, executes the routines 7118 and uses the data/information 7120 in memory 7110 to control the operation of the wireless terminal 7100 and implement methods.

Receiver module 7102, e.g., an OFDM receiver, is coupled to receive antenna 7103 via which the wireless terminal 7100 receives downlink signals from base stations. Receiver module 7102 includes a decoder 7114 which decodes at least some of the received downlink signals. Transmitter module 7104, e.g., an OFDM transmitter, is coupled to a transmit antenna 7105 via which the wireless terminal 7100 transmits uplink signals to base stations. Transmitter module 7104 is used for transmitting a plurality of different types of fixed reports using uplink dedicated control channel segments dedicated to the wireless terminal. Transmitter module 7104 is also used for transmitting flexible reports using uplink dedicated control channel segments dedicated to the wireless terminal, the uplink DCCH segments which include a flexible report being the same size as at least some of the uplink DCCH segments which include fixed type reports and do not include a flexible report. Transmitter module 7104 includes an encoder 7116 which is used to encode at least some of the uplink signals prior to transmission. In some embodiments, each individual dedicated control channel uplink segment is encoded independently of other dedicated control channel uplink segments. In various embodiments, the same antenna is used for both the transmitter and receiver.

User I/O devices 7108, e.g., microphone, keyboard, keypad, switches, camera, speaker, display, etc., are used to input/output user data, control applications, and control the operation of the wireless terminal, e.g., allowing a user of WT 7100 to initiate a communications session.

Routines 7118 includes a communications routine 7122 and wireless terminal control routines 7124. Communications routine 7122 performs various communications protocols used by wireless terminal 7100. Wireless terminal control routines 7124 include a fixed type report control module 7126, a flexible type report control module 7128, an uplink tone hopping module 7130, an identifier module 7132, and a coding module 7134.

Fixed type report control module 7126 controls the transmission of a plurality of different types of fixed type information reports according to a reporting schedule, said fixed type information reports being of a type dictated by the reporting schedule.

Flexible type report control module 7128 controls transmission of flexible reports at predetermined locations in the reporting schedule, said flexible type reports being of report types selected by the flexible report control module from a plurality of reports which can be reported using a flexible report. Flexible report control module 7128 includes a report prioritization module 7136. The report prioritization module 7136 takes into consideration the amount of uplink data queued for communication to the base station and a least one signal interference measurement, when determining which one of a plurality of alternative reports should be communicated in a flexible report. Report prioritization module 7138 also includes a change determination module 7138, which determines an amount of change in information previously reported in at least one report. For example, if the change determination module 7138 determines that the value of saturation level of SNR indicative of WT self-noise has not changed significantly from the last reported value, but the demand for uplink traffic channel resources has significantly increased from the last reported request, the wireless terminal 7100 may select to use the flexible report to communicate an uplink traffic channel request report instead of a saturation level of SNR report.

Uplink tone hopping module 7130 determines, based on stored tone hopping information, for transmission purposes, the physical tone corresponding to the logical assigned DCCH channel tone at different points in time corresponding to the transmission of dedicated segments. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, a DCCH segment corresponds to three dwells, each dwell using the same physical tone for seven successive OFDM symbol transmission time intervals; however, the physical tone associated with the different dwells is determined by tone hopping information and may be different.

Identifier module 7132 generates flexible type report identifiers to be communicated with flexible reports, the report type identifiers communicated with an individual flexible report indicating the type of flexible report being communicated. In various embodiments, the identifier module 7132 generates a report which indicates the type of flexible report which corresponds to the report type identifier. In this exemplary embodiment, an individual flexible type report is communicated in the same DCCH segment with the corresponding report type identifier. In this exemplary embodiment, identifier module 7132 is not used for fixed type reports as there is a predetermined understanding between the base station and wireless terminal as to the type of fixed report being communicated based on position of the fixed report within the recurring reporting structure.

Coding module 7134 codes an individual flexible report identifier and a corresponding flexible report together in a single coding unit corresponding to the DCCH communications segment in which they are transmitted. In some embodiments, coding module 7134 operates in conjunction with encoder 7116.

Data/information 7120 includes user/device/session/resource information 7140, system data/information 7142, generated fixed type report 1 7144, . . . , generated fixed type report n 7146, selected type of flexible report 7148, generated flexible report 7150, flexible report type identifier 7152, coded DCCH segment information 7154, DCCH channel information 7156 including assigned logical tone information 7158, base station identification information 7160, terminal identification information 7162, timing information 7164, amount of uplink data queued 7166, signal interference information 7168, and report change information 7170. Assigned logical tone information 7158 identifies a base station assigned single logical uplink dedicated control channel tone to be used by the WT 7100 for communicating uplink DCCH segment signals conveying fixed and flexible reports. In some embodiments, the single assigned logical DCCH tone is associated with a base station assigned ON state identifier.

User/device/session/resource information 7140 includes information pertaining to communications sessions, e.g., peer node information, addressing information, routing information, state information, and resource information identifying uplink and downlink air link resources, e.g., segments, allocated to WT 7100. Generated fixed type of report 1 7144 is a fixed type report corresponding to one of the plurality of fixed types of reports supported by WT 7100 and has been generated using fixed type report information 7188. Generated fixed type of report n 7146 is a fixed type report corresponding to one of the plurality of fixed types of reports supported by WT 7100 and has been generated using fixed type report information 7188. Selected type of flexible report 7148 is information identifying the wireless terminal's selection for the type of report to be communicated in the flexible report, e.g., a pattern of two bits identifying one of four patterns corresponding to a TYPE 2 report of FIG. 31. Generated flexible report 7150 is a flexible type report corresponding to one of the plurality of types of reports which may be selected by WT 7100 to be communicated in a flexible report and has been generated using flexible type report information 7190, e.g., a pattern of four bits corresponding to a BODY 4 report and representing a bit pattern of one of an ULRQST4 report, e.g., of FIG. 18, or a DLSSNR4 report of FIG. 30. Coded DCCH segment information 7154 is an output of coding module 7134, e.g., a coded DCCH segment corresponding to a Type 2 and Body 4 report or a coded DCCH segment corresponding to a mixture of fixed type reports.

DCCH channel information 7156 includes information identifying DCCH segments allocated to WT 7100, e.g., information identifying a DCCH mode of operation, e.g., a full-tone DCCH mode or a split tone DCCH mode and information identifying an assigned logical DCCH tone 7158 in a DCCH channel structure being used by the base station attachment point. Base station identification information 7160 includes information identifying the base station attachment point being used by WT 7200, e.g., information identifying a base station, base station sector, and/or carrier or tone block pair associated with the attachment point. Terminal identification information 7162 includes WT 7100 identification information and base station assigned wireless terminal identifiers temporarily associated with WT 7100, e.g., a registered user identifier, an active user identifier, an ON state identifier associated with a logical DCCH channel tone. Timing information 7164 includes current timing information, e.g., identifying a current OFDM symbol time within a recurring timing structure. Timing information 7164 is used by fixed type control module 7126 in conjunction with uplink timing/frequency structure information 7178 and fixed type report transmission scheduling information 7184 in deciding when to transmit different types of fixed reports. Timing information 7164 is used by flexible report control module 7128 in conjunction with uplink timing/frequency structure information 7178 and flexible type report transmission scheduling information 7186 in deciding when to transmit a flexible report. Amount of uplink data queued 7166, e.g., amounts of MAC frames in request group queues and/or combinations of amounts of MAC frames in request group queue sets, is used by report prioritization module 7136 in selecting the type of report to be communicated in a flexible report slot. Signal interference information 7168 is also used by prioritization module 7136 in selecting the type of report to be communicated in a flexible report slot. Report change information 7170, e.g., information indicating deltas from previously communicated DCCH reports, obtained from change determination module 7138 is used by report prioritization module 7136 in selecting the type of report to be communicated in a flexible report slot.

System data/information 7142 includes a plurality of sets of base station data/information (BS 1 data/information 7172, . . . , BS M data/information 7174), DCCH report transmission scheduling information 7182, fixed type report information 7188, and flexible type report information 7190. BS 1 data/information 7172 includes downlink timing and frequency structure information 7176 and uplink timing/frequency structure information 7178. Downlink timing/frequency structure information 7176 includes downlink carrier information, downlink tone block information, number of downlink tones, downlink tone hopping information, downlink channel segment information, OFDM symbol timing information, and grouping of OFDM symbols. Uplink timing/frequency structure information 7178 includes uplink carrier information, uplink tone block information, number of uplink tones, uplink tone hopping information, uplink channel segment information, OFDM symbol timing information, and grouping of OFDM symbols. The uplink timing/frequency structure information 7178 includes tone hopping information 7180.

DCCH report transmission scheduling information 7182 is used in controlling the transmission of reports to a base station, e.g., access node, using dedicated segments of a communications control channel. DCCH transmission scheduling information 7182 includes information identifying the composite of different DCCH segments in a recurring reporting schedule identifying the location and type of fixed type reports within the recurring schedule and identifying the location of flexible type reports within the recurring schedule. Report transmission scheduling information 7182 includes fixed type report information 7184 and flexible type report information 7186. For example, in one exemplary embodiment the recurring schedule includes 40 indexed DCCH segments, and the composite of each indexed segment in terms of fixed and/or flexible report inclusion is identified by report transmission scheduling information 7182. FIG. 10 provides an example of exemplary DCCH report transmission schedule information corresponding to a recurring structure including 40 indexed DCCH segments used in a full-tone DCCH mode of operation occurring in a beaconslot. In the example, of FIG. 10, the BODY 4 reports are flexible reports and the TYPE2 reports are identifier reports identifying the type of report communicated in a corresponding BODY4 report for the same DCCH segment. The other illustrated reports, e.g., DLSNR5 report, ULRQST1 report, DLDNSNR3 report, ULRQST3 report, RSVD2 report, ULRQST4 report, ULTXBKF5 report, DLBNR4 report, RSVD1 report, and DLSSNR4 report, are fixed type reports. There are more fixed reports than flexible reports in one iteration of the reporting schedule. In some embodiments, the reporting schedule includes at least 8 times as many fixed reports as flexible reports in one iteration of the reporting schedule. In some embodiments, the reporting schedule includes, on average, less than one dedicated control channel segment used to report a flexible report for each nine dedicated control channel segments used to transmit a fixed report.

Fixed type report information 7188 includes information identifying the format for each of the plurality of fixed types of reports communicated over the dedicated control channel, e.g., number of information bits associated with a report and interpretation given to each of the possible bit patterns that can be communicated. The plurality of fixed type information reports include: uplink traffic channel request reports, a wireless terminal self-nose report, e.g., a downlink saturation level of self-noise SNR report, an absolute report of downlink SNR, a relative report of downlink SNR, an uplink transmission power report, e.g., a WT transmission power backoff report, and an interference report, e.g., a beacon ratio report. FIGS. 13, 15, 16, 18, 19, 26, 29, and 30 illustrate exemplary fixed type report information 7188 corresponding to a DLSNR5 report, a DLDSNR3 report, a ULRQST1 report, a ULRQST4 report, an ULRQST 3 report, an ULTxBKF5 report, and a DLBNR4 report, respectively.

Flexible type report information 7190 includes information identifying the format for each of the potential types of reports that may be selected to be communicated in a flexible report that is to communicated over the dedicated control channel, e.g., number of information bits associated with a report and interpretation given to each of the possible bit patterns that can be communicated. Flexible type report information 7190 also includes information identifying a flexible type indicator report to accompany the flexible report, e.g., number of information bits associated with the flexible type indicator report and designation of the type of flexible report that each bit pattern signifies. In some embodiments, at least some of the types of reports that may be selected by the WT to be communicated in a flexible report are the same as the fixed type of report. For example, in one exemplary embodiment the flexible report can selected from a set of reports including a 4 bit uplink traffic channel request report and a 4 bit downlink saturation level of SNR report, the 4 bit uplink traffic channel request report and the 4 bit downlink saturation level of SNR report following the same format used when communicated as a fixed type report in a predetermined fixed position in the recurring reporting schedule. FIGS. 31, 18, and 30 illustrate exemplary flexible type report information 7190.

FIG. 72 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal 7200, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary WT 7200 may be any of the wireless terminals of the exemplary system of FIG. 1. Exemplary WT 7200 may be any of the WTs (136, 138, 144, 146, 152, 154, 168, 170, 172, 174, 176, 178) of exemplary system 100 of FIG. 1. Exemplary wireless terminal 7200 includes a receiver module 7202, a transmitter module 7204, a processor 7206, user I/O devices 7208, and a memory 7210 coupled together via a bus 7212 over which the various elements may interchange data/information.

Memory 7210 includes routines 7218 and data/information 7220. The processor 7206, e.g., a CPU, executes the routines 7218 and uses the data/information 7220 in memory 7210 to control the operation of the wireless terminal 7200 and implement methods.

Receiver module 7202, e.g., an OFDM receiver, is coupled to receive antenna 7203 via which the wireless terminal 7200 receives downlink signals from base stations. Receiver module 7202 includes a decoder 7214 which decodes at least some of the received downlink signals. Received downlink signals include signals conveying base station attachment point identification information, e.g., beacon signals, and signals including base station assigned wireless terminal identifiers, e.g., an ON state identifier assigned to WT 7200 by a base station attachment point, the ON state identifier associated with dedicated control channel segments to be used by WT 7200. Other received downlink signals include assignment signals corresponding to uplink and/or downlink traffic channel segments and downlink traffic channel segment signals. Assignments of uplink traffic channel segments by a base station attachment point to WT 7200 may be in response to received backlog information reports from WT 7200.

Transmitter module 7204, e.g., an OFDM transmitter, is coupled to a transmit antenna 7205 via which the wireless terminal 7200 transmits uplink signals to base stations. Transmitter module 7204 is used for transmitting at least some of the generated backlog information reports. The transmitted generated backlog information reports are transmitted by transmitter module 7204 in uplink control channel segments dedicated to the wireless terminal 7200. Transmitter module 7204 is also used for transmitting uplink traffic channel segment signals. Transmitter module 7204 includes an encoder 7216 which is used to encode at least some of the uplink signals prior to transmission. In some embodiments, each individual dedicated control channel uplink segment is encoded independently of other dedicated control channel uplink segments. In various embodiments, the same antenna is used for both the transmitter and receiver.

User I/O devices 7208, e.g., microphone, keyboard, keypad, switches, camera, speaker, display, etc., are used to input/output user data, control applications, and control the operation of the wireless terminal, e.g., allowing a user of WT 7200 to initiate a communications session.

Routines 7218 includes a communications routine 7222 and wireless terminal control routines 7224. Communications routine 7222 performs various communications protocols used by wireless terminal 7200. Wireless terminal control routines 7224 controls operations of the wireless terminal 7200 including receiver module 7202 control, transmitter module 7204 control, and user I/O devices 7208 control. Wireless terminal control routines 7224 are used to implement methods.

Wireless terminal control routines 7224 include a queue status monitoring module 7226, a transmission backlog report generation module 7228, a transmission backlog report control module 7230, and a coding module 7332. Queue status monitoring module 7266 monitors the amount of information in at least one of a plurality of different queues used to store information to be transmitted. The amount of information in a queue changes over time, e.g., as additional data/information needs to be transmitted, data/information is successfully transmitted, data/information needs to be retransmitted, data/information is dropped, e.g., due to a time consideration or due to the termination of a session or application. Transmission backlog report generation module 7288 generates different bit size backlog information reports providing transmission backlog information, e.g. 1 bit uplink request reports. 3 bit uplink request reports, and 4 bit uplink request reports. Transmission backlog report control module 7230 controls the transmission of generated backlog information reports. Transmission backlog report generation module 7228 includes an information grouping module 7234. Information grouping module 7234 groups status information corresponding to different sets of queues. Grouping module 7234 supports different information groupings for backlog information reports of different bit sizes. Coding module 7332 codes information to be transmitted in dedicated uplink control channel segments, and for at least some segments, the coding module 7332 codes a transmission backlog report with at least one additional backlog report used to communicate non-backlog control information. Possible additional reports, which are encoded with transmission backlog reports for a DCCH segment, include signal to noise ratio reports, self-noise report, an interference report, and a wireless terminal transmission power report.

Data/information 7220 includes user/device/session/resource information 7236, system data/information 7238, queue information 7240, DCCH channel information 7242 including assigned logical tone information 7244,base station identification information 7246, terminal identification information 7248, timing information 7250, combined request group information 7252, generated 1 bit uplink request report 7254, generated 3 bit uplink request report 7256, generated 4 bit uplink request report 7258, generated additional DCCH report 7260, and coded DCCH segment information 7262.

User/device/session/resource information 7236 includes information pertaining to communications sessions, e.g., peer node information, addressing information, routing information, state information, and resource information identifying uplink and downlink air link resources, e.g., segments, allocated to WT 7200. Queue information 7240 includes user data that WT 7200 intends to transmit, e.g., MAC frames of user data associated with a queue, and information identifying the amount of user data that WT 7200 intends to transmit, e.g., a total number of MAC frames associated with a queue. Queue information 7240 includes request group 0 information 7264, request group 1 information 7266, request group 2 information 7268, and request group 3 information 7270.

DCCH channel information 7242 includes information identifying DCCH segments allocated to WT 7200, e.g., information identifying a DCCH mode of operation, e.g., a full-tone DCCH mode or a split tone DCCH mode and information identifying an assigned logical DCCH tone 7244 in a DCCH channel structure being used by the base station attachment point. Base station identification information 7246 includes information identifying the base station attachment point being used by WT 7200, e.g., information identifying a base station, base station sector, and/or carrier or tone block pair associated with the attachment point. Terminal identification information 7248 includes WT 7200 identification information and base station assigned wireless terminal identifiers temporarily associated with WT 7200, e.g., a registered user identifier, an active user identifier, an ON state identifier associated with a logical DCCH channel tone. Timing information 7250 includes current timing information, e.g., identifying a current OFDM symbol time within a recurring timing structure. Timing information 7250 is used by transmission backlog report control module 7230 in conjunction with uplink timing/frequency structure information 7278 and stored transmission backlog reporting schedule information 7281 in deciding when to transmit different types of backlog reports. Combined request group information 7254 includes information pertaining to combinations of request groups, e.g., a value identifying the amount of information, e.g., total number of MAC frames, to be transmitted corresponding to the combination of request group 0 and request group 1.

Generated 1 bit uplink request report 7254 is a 1 information bit transmission backlog report generated by transmission backlog report generation module 7228 using queue information 7240 and/or combined request group information 7252, and 1 bit size report mapping information 7290. Generated 3 bit uplink request report 7256 is a 3 information bit transmission backlog report generated by transmission backlog report generation module 7228 using queue information 7240 and/or combined request group information 7252, and 3 bit size report mapping information 7292. Generated 4 bit uplink request report 7258 is a 4 information bit transmission backlog report generated by transmission backlog report generation module 7228 using queue information 7240 and/or combined request group information 7252, and 4 bit size report mapping information 7294. Generated additional DCCH report 7260 is, e.g., a generated downlink absolute SNR report, a generated delta SNR report, a generated interference report, e.g., a beacon ratio report, a generated self-noise report, e.g., a WT self-noise report of saturation level of SNR, a WT power report, e.g., a WT transmission power backoff report. Coding module 7234 codes a transmission backlog report 7254, 7256, 7258, with a generated additional report 7260, for a given DCCH segment, obtaining coded DCCH segment information. In this exemplary embodiment, each DCCH segment is the same size, e.g., uses the same number of tone-symbols, regardless of whether the transmission backlog report included in the DCCH segment is a 1 bit report, 3 bit report, or 4 bit report. For example, for one DCCH segment a 1 bit UL request transmission backlog report is jointly coded with a 5 bit downlink absolute SNR report; for another DCCH segment a 3 bit UL request transmission backlog report is jointly coded with a 3 bit downlink delta SNR report; for another DCCH segment a 4 bit UL request transmission backlog report is jointly coded with a 2 bit reserved report.

System data/information 7238 includes a plurality of sets of base station information (BS 1 data/information 7272, . . . , BS M data/information 7274), dedicated control channel report transmission reporting schedule information 7280, stored transmission backlog report mapping information 7288, and queue sets' information 7296. BS 1 data/information 7272 includes downlink timing/frequency structure information 7276 and uplink timing/frequency structure information 7278. Downlink timing/frequency structure information 7276 includes downlink carrier information, downlink tone block information, number of downlink tones, downlink tone hopping information, downlink channel segment information, OFDM symbol timing information, and grouping of OFDM symbols. Uplink timing/frequency structure information 7278 includes uplink carrier information, uplink tone block information, number of uplink tones, uplink tone hopping information, uplink channel segment information, OFDM symbol timing information, and grouping of OFDM symbols. DCCH report transmission reporting schedule information 7280 includes stored transmission backlog reporting schedule information 7281. FIG. 10 provides exemplary DCCH transmission schedule information corresponding to a recurring schedule of 40 indexed DCCH segments in a beaconslot for a full-tone DCCH mode of operation, the beaconslot being a structure used in the timing/frequency structure of the base station. Stored transmission backlog reporting schedule information includes information identifying the location of each of transmission backlog reports, e.g., the location of the ULRQST1, ULRQST3, and ULRQST4 reports in FIG. 10. The stored transmission backlog reporting scheduling information 7281 is used by the transmission backlog report control module 7230 in determining when to transmit a report of a particular bit size. The stored transmission backlog reporting schedule information 7281 includes 1 bit size report information 7282, 3 bit size report information 7284, and 4 bit size report information 7286. For example, with respect to FIG. 10, 1 bit size report information 7282 includes information identifying that an ULRQST1 report corresponds to the LSB of DCCH segment with index s2=0; 3 bit size report information 7284 includes information identifying that an ULRQST3 report corresponds to the 3 LSBs of DCCH segment with index s2=2; 4 bit size report information 7286 includes information identifying that an ULRQST4 report corresponds to the 4 LSBs of DCCH segment with index s2=4.

The stored transmission backlog scheduling information 7281 indicates that more 1 bit size backlog reports are to be transmitted than 3 bit size backlog reports in one iteration of the transmission report schedule. The stored transmission backlog scheduling information 7281 also indicates that more or the same number of 3 bit size backlog reports are to be transmitted than 4 bit size backlog reports in one iteration of the transmission report schedule. For example, in FIG. 10, there are 16 identified ULRQST1 reports, 12 identified ULRQST3 reports, and 9 identified ULRQST4 reports. In this exemplary embodiment corresponding to FIG. 10, the flexible reports, Body 4 reports, may convey a 4 bit ULRQST report, and under a case where the 3 flexible reports, of one iteration of the reporting structure, carry a ULRQST4 report, the wireless terminal communicates 12 ULRQST4 reports.

Stored transmission backlog report mapping information 7288 includes 1 bit size report information 7290, 3 bit size report information 7292, and 4 bit size report information 7294. Examples of 1 bit size report mapping information 7290 includes FIG. 16 and FIG. 61. Examples of 3 bit size report mapping information include FIGS. 19, 21, 23, 25, 64, 66, 68, and 70. Examples of 4 bit size report mapping information include FIGS. 18, 20, 22, 24, 63, 65, 67, and 69. Stored transmission backlog mapping information 7288 includes information indicating a mapping between queue status information and bit patterns that can be communicated using the different bit size backlog reports. In this exemplary embodiment, the 1 bit size backlog report provides backlog information corresponding to a plurality of different transmission queues; the one bit indicates the existence of information to be transmitted or lack thereof corresponding to the combination of request group 0 and request group 1. In various embodiments, the smallest bit size, e.g., 1 bit size, backlog report is used for highest priority traffic, e.g., where the highest priority is voice or control traffic. In some embodiments, the second bit size report, e.g., the 3 bit size report, communicates a delta, with respect to a previously communicated third bit size report, e.g., 4 bit size report; FIGS. 63 and 64 illustrates such a relationship. In some embodiments, the second fixed size report, e.g., the 3 bit size report, provides information on two sets of queues. For example, consider FIG. 41, the second type of report communicates information on a second set of queues and a third set of queues. In various embodiments, the third size report, e.g., the 4 bit size report, provides information on one set of queues. In some such embodiments, the one set of queues includes one request group queue, two request group queues, or three request group queues. In some embodiments, there are predetermined number of request groups for uplink traffic, e.g., four, RG0, RG1, RG2, and RG3, and a third fixed size report, e.g., the four bit size report is capable of communicating backlog information corresponding to any of the different request group queues. For example, consider FIG. 41, a third type report communicates information on one of a fourth set of queues, a fifth set of queues, a sixth set of queues or a seventh set of queues, and for any given dictionary the third type of report is capable of communicating information pertaining to RG0, RG1, RG2, and RG3.

Queue sets' information 7296 including information identifying grouping of queues to be used when generating transmission backlog reports. FIG. 41 illustrates exemplary groupings of queues used in various exemplary types of transmission backlog reports.

FIG. 74 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal 7400, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary wireless terminal 7400 may be any of the wireless terminals of FIG. 1. Exemplary wireless terminal 7400 includes a receiver module 7402, a transmitter module 7404, a processor 7406, user I/O devices 7408, and memory 7410 coupled together via a bus 7412 over which the various elements interchange data and information.

Memory 7410 includes routines 7418 and data/information 7420. The processor 7406, e.g., a CPU, executes the routines 7418 and uses the data/information 7420 in memory 7410 to control the operation of the wireless terminal 7400 and implement methods. User I/O devices 7408, e.g., microphone, keyboard, keypad, switches, camera, display, speaker, etc., are used to input user data, output user data, allow a user to control applications, and/or control various functions of the wireless terminal, e.g., initiate a communications session.

Receiver module 7402, e.g., an OFDM receiver, is coupled to a receive antenna 7403 via which the wireless terminal 7400 receives downlink signals from base stations. Received downlink signals include, e.g., beacon signals, pilot signals, downlink traffic channel signals, power control signals including closed loop power control signals, timing control signals, assignment signals, registration response signals, and signals including base station assigned wireless terminal identifiers, e.g., an ON state identifier associated with a DCCH logical channel tone. Receiver module 7402 includes a decoder 7414 used to decode at least some of the received downlink signals.

Transmitter module 7404, e.g., an OFDM transmitter, is coupled to a transmit antenna 7405 via which the wireless terminal 7400 transmits uplink signals to base stations. In some embodiments, the same antenna is used for receiver and transmitter, e.g., the antenna is coupled through a duplexer module to receiver module 7402 and transmitter module 7404. Uplink signals include, e.g., registration request signals, dedicated control channel segment signals, e.g., conveying a reference signal which can be measured by a base station and reports including WT power reports such as a WT transmission power backoff report, and uplink traffic channel segment signals. Transmitter module 7404 includes an encoder 7416 used to encode at least some of the uplink signals. DCCH segments, in this embodiment, are encoded on a per segment basis.

Routines 7418 includes a communications routine 7422 and wireless terminal control routines 7422. The communications routine 7422 implements the various communications protocols used by the wireless terminal 7400. Wireless terminal control routines 7422 include a report generation module 7426, a wireless terminal transmission power control module 7430, a dedicated control channel control module 7432, a tone hopping module 7434, and a report format control module 7436. Report generation module 7426 includes a computation sub-module 7428.

Report generation module 7426 generates power reports, e.g., wireless terminal transmission power backoff reports, each power report indicating a ratio of a maximum transmit power of the wireless terminal to the transmit power of a reference signal having a power level known to the wireless terminal at a point in time corresponding to the power report. Wireless terminal transmission power control module 7430 is used for controlling the wireless terminal's transmission power level based on information including at least one closed loop power level control signal received from a base station. The closed loop power control signal received from the base station may be a signal used to control the wireless terminal transmitter power so that a desired received power level is achieved at the base station. In some embodiments, the base station does not have actual knowledge of the wireless terminals actual transmission power level and/or maximum transmit power level. In some system implementations different devices may have different maximum transmit power levels, e.g., a desk top wireless terminal may have a different maximum transmission power capability than a portable notebook computer implemented wireless terminal, e.g., operating off battery power.

Wireless terminal transmission power control module 7430 performs closed loop power control adjustments of a transmission power level associated with the dedicated control channel. Dedicated control channel control module 7432 determines which single logical tone in a plurality of logical tones is to be used for the dedicated control channel signaling, said single logical tone being dedicated to the wireless terminal for use in transmitting control signaling using a set of dedicated control channel segments.

Tone hopping module 7434 determines at different points in time a single physical OFDM tone to be used to communicate dedicated control channel information during a plurality of consecutive OFDM symbol transmission time intervals. For example, in one exemplary embodiments, a dedicated control channel segment corresponding to a single dedicated control channel logical tone includes 21 OFDM tone-symbol, the 21 OFDM tone-symbols comprising three sets of 7 OFDM tone-symbols, each set of seven OFDM tone-symbols corresponding to a half-slot of seven consecutive OFDM symbol transmission time periods and corresponding to a physical OFDM tone, each of the three sets may correspond to a different physical OFDM tone with the OFDM tone for a set being determined in accordance with tone hopping information. Report format control module 7436 controls the format of the power report as a function of which one of a plurality of dedicated control channel modes of operation is being used by the wireless terminal 7400 at the time the report is transmitted. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, the wireless terminal uses a 5 bit format for the power report when in a full-tone DCCH mode of operation and uses a 4 bit power report when in a split-tone mode of operation.

Computation sub-module 7428 subtracts a per-tone transmission power of an uplink dedicated control channel in dBm from a maximum transmission power of the wireless terminal in dBm. In some embodiments, the maximum transmission power is a set value, e.g., a predetermined value stored in the wireless terminal or a value communicated to the wireless terminal, e.g., from a base station, and stored in the wireless terminal. In some embodiments, the maximum transmission power depends on a power output capacity of the wireless terminal. In some embodiments, the maximum transmission power is dependent upon the type of wireless terminal. In some embodiments, the maximum transmission power is dependent upon a mode of operation of the wireless terminal, e.g., with different modes corresponding to at least two of the following: operation using an external power source, operation using a battery, operation using a battery having a first level of energy reserve, operation using a battery having a second level of energy reserve, operation using a battery with an expected amount of energy reserve to support a first duration of operational time, operation using a battery with an expected amount of energy reserve to support a second duration of operational time, operation in a normal power mode, operation in a power saving mode said maximum transmit power in the power saving mode being lower than said maximum transmit power in said normal power mode. In various embodiments, the maximum transmission power value is a value which has been selected to be in compliance with a government regulation limiting the maximum output power level of the wireless terminal, e.g., the maximum transmission power value is selected to be the maximum permissible level. Different devices may have different maximum power level capabilities which may or may not be known to a base station. The base station can, and in some embodiments does, use the backoff report in determining the supportable uplink traffic channel data throughput, e.g., per transmission segment throughput, which can be supported by the wireless terminal. This is because the backoff report provides information about the additional power which can be used for traffic channel transmissions even though the base station may not know the actual transmission power level being used or the maximum capability of the wireless terminal since the backoff report is provided in the form of a ratio.

In some embodiments the wireless terminal can support one or more wireless connections at the same time, each connection having a corresponding maximum transmission power level. The maximum transmission power levels, indicated by values, may be different for different connections. In addition, for a given connection the maximum transmission power level may vary over time, e.g., as the number of connections being supported by the wireless terminal varies. Thus, it may be noted that even if the base station knew the maximum transmission power capability of a wireless terminal, the base station may not be aware of the number of communications links being supported by the wireless terminal at a particular point in time. However, the backoff report provides information which informs the base station about the available power for a given connection without requiring the base station to know about other possible existing connections which may be consuming power resources.

Data/information 7420 includes user/device/session/resource information 7440, system data 7442, received power control signal information 7484, maximum transmission power information 7486, DCCH power information 7490, timing information 7492, DCCH channel information 7494, base station identification information 7498, terminal identification information 7499, power report information 7495, additional DCCH reports' information 7493, coded DCCH segment information 7491, and DCCH mode information 7489. DCCH channel information 7494 includes assigned logical tone information 7496, e.g., information identifying the single logical DCCH channel tone currently allocated to the wireless terminal by a base station attachment point.

User/device/session/resource information 7440 includes user identification information, username information, user security information, device identification information, device type information, device control parameters, session information such as peer node information, security information, state information, peer node identification information, peer node addressing information, routing information, air link resource information such as uplink and/or downlink channel segments assigned to WT 7400. Received power control information 7484 includes received WT power control commands from a base station, e.g., to increase, decrease or do not change the transmission power level of the wireless terminal with respect to a control channel being closed loop power controlled, e.g., a DCCH channel. Maximum transmit power information 7486 includes a maximum wireless terminal transmit power value to be used in generating a power report. Reference signal information 7496 includes information identifying the reference signal to be used in the power report calculation, e.g., as the DCCH channel signal, and a transmit power level of the reference signal at a point in time, the point in time being determined based on the start transmit time of the DCCH segment in which the power report is communicated and power report time offset information 7472. DCCH power information 7490 is the result of computation sub-module 7428 which the maximum transmit power information 7486 and the reference signal info 7497 as input. DCCH power information 7490 is represented by a bit pattern in power report information 7495 for communicating a power report. Additional DCCH reports' information 7493 includes information corresponding to other types of DCCH reports, e.g., other DCCH reports such as a 1 bit uplink traffic channel request report or a 4 bit uplink traffic channel request report, which is communicated in the same DCCH segment as a power report. Coded DCCH segment information 7491 includes information representing a coded DCCH segment, e.g., a DCCH segment conveying a power report and an additional report. Timing information 7492 includes information identifying the timing of the reference signal information and information identifying the timing of the start of a DCCH segment to be used to communicate a power report. Timing information 7492 includes information identifying the current timing, e.g., relating indexed OFDM symbol timing within an uplink timing and frequency structure to recurring DCCH reporting schedule information, e.g., to indexed DCCH segments. Timing information 7492 is also used by the tone hopping module 7344 to determine tone hopping. Base station identification information 7498 includes information identifying the base station, base station sector, and/or base station tone block associated with a base station attachment point being used by the wireless terminal. Terminal identification information 7499 includes wireless terminal identification information including base station assigned wireless terminal identifiers, e.g., a base station assigned wireless terminal ON state identifier to be associated with DCCH channel segments. DCCH channel information 7496 includes information identifying the DCCH channel, e.g., as a fall-tone channel or as one of a plurality of split tone channel. Assigned logical tone information 7496 includes information identifying the logical DCCH tone to be used by the WT 7400 for its DCCH channel, e.g., one DCCH logical tone from the set of tones identified by information 7454, the identified tone corresponding to a base station assigned WT ON state identifier of terminal ID information 7499. DCCH mode information 7489 includes information identifying the current DCCH mode of operation, e.g., as a full-tone format mode of operation or a split-tone format mode of operation. In some embodiments, DCCH mode information 7489 also includes information identifying different mode of operation corresponding to different values for the maximum transmit power information, e.g., a normal mode and a power saving mode.

System data/information 7442 includes a plurality of sets of base station data/information (BS 1 data/information 7444, BS M data/information 7446), DCCH transmission reporting schedule information 7462, power report time offset information 7472 and DCCH report format information 7476. BS 1 data/information 7442 includes downlink timing/frequency structure information 7448 and uplink timing/frequency structure information 7450. Downlink timing/frequency structure information 7448 includes information identifying downlink tone sets, e.g., a tone block of 113 tones, downlink channel segment structure, downlink tone hopping information, downlink carrier frequency information, and downlink timing information including OFDM symbol timing information and grouping of OFDM symbols, as well as timing information relating the downlink and uplink. Uplink timing/frequency structure information 7450 includes uplink logical tone set information 7452, tone hopping information 7456, timing structure information 7458, and carrier information 7460. Uplink logical tone set information 7452, e.g., information corresponding to a set of 113 uplink logical tones in an uplink channel structure being used by a base station attachment point, includes DCCH logical channel tone information 7454, e.g., information corresponding to a subset of 31 logical tones used for the dedicated control channel with a wireless terminal in the ON state using the BS 1 attachment point receiving one of the 31 tones to use for its dedicated control channel segment signaling. Carrier information 7460 includes information identifying the uplink carrier frequency corresponding to a base station 1 attachment point.

DCCH transmission reporting schedule information 7462 includes DCCH full tone mode recurring reporting schedule information 7464 and split-tone mode recurring reporting schedule information 7466. Full tone mode recurring reporting schedule information 7464 includes power report schedule information 7468. Split tone mode recurring reporting schedule information 7466 includes power report schedule information 7470. DCCH report format information 7476 includes power report format information 7478. Power report format information 7478 includes full-tone mode information 7480 and split tone mode information 7482.

DCCH transmission reporting scheduling information 7462 is used in controlling the transmission of generated DCCH reports. Full tone mode recurring reporting scheduling information 7464 is in for controlling DCCH reports when the wireless terminal 7400 is operating in a full-tone mode of DCCH operation. Drawing 1099 of FIG. 10 illustrates exemplary full-tone mode DCCCH recurring reporting schedule information 7464. Exemplary power report schedule information 7468 is information indicating that segment 1006 with index s2=6 and segment 1026 with index s2=26 are each used to convey a 5 bit wireless terminal uplink transmission power backoff report (ULTXBKF5). Drawing 3299 of FIG. 32 illustrates exemplary split-tone mode DCCCH recurring reporting schedule information 7466. Exemplary power report schedule information 7470 is information indicating that segment 3203 with index s2=3 and segment 3221 with index s2=21 are each used to convey a 4 bit wireless terminal uplink transmission power backoff report (ULTXBKF4).

DCCH report format information 7476 indicates formats used for each of the DCCH reports, e.g., number of bits in a report, and the information associated with each of potential bit patterns that can be communicated with the report. Exemplary full-tone mode power report format information 7480 includes information corresponding to Table 2600 of FIG. 26 illustrating the format of ULTxBKF5. Exemplary split-tone mode power report format information 7482 includes information corresponding to Table 3500 of FIG. 35 illustrating the format of ULTxBKF4. Backoff Reports ULTxBKF5 and ULTxBKF4 indicate a dB value.

Power report time offset information 7472 includes information indicating a time offset between the point in time to which a generated power report corresponds, e.g., provides information for, and a start of a communications segment in which said report is to be transmitted. For example, consider that a ULTxBKF5 report is to be communicated in an exemplary uplink segment corresponding to segment 1006 with index s2=6 of a beaconslot and consider that the reference signal used in generating the report is the dedicated control channel signal, power report time offset information 7472. In such a case, the time offset information 7472 includes information indicating a time offset between the time to which the report information corresponds, e.g., the OFDM symbol transmission time interval prior to the transmission time of the report corresponding to the reference signal, e.g., DCCH signal, transmission power level and a start of the segment 1006 transmission.

FIG. 75 is a drawing 7500 used to explain features of an exemplary embodiment using a wireless terminal transmission power report. Vertical axis 7502 represents the transmission power level of the wireless terminal's dedicated control channel, e.g., a single tone channel, while horizontal axis represents time 7504. The dedicated control channel is used by the wireless terminal to communicate various uplink control information reports via dedicated control channel segment signals. The various uplink control information reports include a wireless terminal transmission power report, e.g., a WT transmission power backoff report, and other addition control information reports, e.g., uplink traffic channel request reports, interference reports, SNR reports, self-noise reports, etc.

Each small shaded circle, e.g., circle 7506, is used to represent the transmission power level of the dedicated control channel at a corresponding point in time. For example, each point in time, in some embodiments, corresponds to an OFDM symbol transmission time interval and the identified power level is the power level associated with the modulation symbol corresponding to the single tone of the WT's DCCH channel during that OFDM symbol transmission time interval. In some embodiments, each point in time, corresponds to a dwell, e.g., representing a fixed number, e.g., seven, of consecutive OFDM symbol transmission time periods using the same physical tone for the wireless terminal's DCCH channel.

Dashed line box 7514 represents a DCCH segment which conveys a WT transmission power backoff report. The segment includes multiple OFDM symbol transmission time periods. In some embodiments, a DCCH segment includes 21 OFDM tone-symbols and includes 21 OFDM symbol transmission time intervals, one OFDM tone-symbol corresponding to each of the 21 OFDM symbol transmission time intervals.

The exemplary transmission backoff report indicates a ratio of a maximum transmission power of the WT, e.g., a set value, to the transmit power of a reference signal. In this exemplary embodiment, the reference signal is the DCCH channel signal at a point in time which is offset from the start of the DCCH segment used to communicate the transmission power backoff report. Time 7516 identifies the start of the DCCH segment conveying the WT transmission power backoff report. Time offset 7518, e.g., a predetermined value, relates time 7516 to time 7512 which is the transmission time of the reference signal used to generate the power report of segment 7514. X 7508 identifies the reference signal in terms of a power level 7510 and the time 7512.

In addition to the DCCH control channel which is used in various embodiments for wireless terminals in an ON state, it should be appreciated that the system also supports additional dedicated uplink control signaling channels, e.g., timing control channels and/or state transition request channels which may be dedicated to a wireless terminal. These additional channels may exist in the case of the hold state in addition to the ON state with terminals in the ON-State being provided the DCCH control channel in addition to the timing and state transition request channels. Signaling on the timing control and/or state transition request channels occurs at a much lower rate than signaling on the DCCH control channel, e.g., at rate ⅕ or less from the wireless terminals perspective. In some embodiments, the dedicated uplink channels provided in the hold state based on Active user IDs assigned by the base station attachment point while DCCH channel resources are allocated by the base station attachment point based on information including an ON state identifier assigned by the base station attachment point.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart 7600 of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal, e.g., mobile node, to report transmission backlog information. For example, the wireless terminal, in some embodiments, maintains one or more request group queues corresponding to uplink information that the wireless terminal would like to communicate to a base station via uplink traffic channel segments; and the wireless terminal reports transmission backlog information corresponding to the request group queue(s) as part of uplink reports in a dedicated control channel reporting structure.

Operation of the exemplary method starts in step 7602 and proceeds to step 7604 or 7606. Step 7604 is a step performed in some embodiments, but omitted in other embodiments. In step 7604, the wireless terminal stores reporting control factor mapping information, e.g., information mapping at least one of an interference report and a transmission power report to at least one reporting control factor as a function of stored values. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, the information being stored in step 7604 may include information defining the conditional equations of table 6200 of FIG. 62, the interference report is a beacon ratio report, the transmission power report is a transmission power backoff report, and the stored values include conditional limit values, e.g., the values to which x and b are compared in column 6202 of table 6200 of FIG. 62. The storing of step 7604, is in some embodiments performed as part of an initial load, e.g., factory load, of the wireless terminal, and/or as part of an update in the field. Operation proceeds from step 7604 to step 7606.

In step 7606, the wireless terminal generates at least one reporting control factor as a function of at least one of: channel quality information, available transmission power information, device capability information, and quality of service information. For example, in one embodiment, the wireless terminal generates y and z control factors in accordance with table 6200. Operation proceeds from step 7606 to step 7608.

In step 7608, the wireless terminal maps a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, the wireless terminal uses the generated y and z control factors from table 6200 in determining a report value for a request report, e.g., a report value for a 4 bit uplink request report of one of table 6300 of FIG. 63, table 6500 of FIG. 65, table 6700 of FIG. 67 and table 6900 of FIG. 69. The selection of the one of table 6300, table 6500, table 6700, and table 6900 to use, in mapping the number of frames to be communicated to a report value for the 4 bit uplink request report is dependent upon the request dictionary currently in use by the wireless terminal.

In some embodiments, the reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information and the channel quality information includes at least one of: uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information and downlink signal to interference information.

In some embodiments the reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information and the channel quality information includes uplink interference information. For example in some exemplary embodiments, the uplink interference information includes beacon ratio information. For example, control factors y of table 6200 is a function of input value b, an adjusted generic beacon ratio report, which is a function of the most recent generic 4 bit downlink beacon ratio report DLBNR4. Control factors z of table 6200 is also a function of input value b, an adjusted generic beacon ratio report, which is a function of the most recent generic 4 bit downlink beacon ratio report DLBNR4.

In some embodiments the reporting control factor is a function of available transmission power information and the available transmission power information includes information indicating the amount of transmission power available for transmission of information including at least said frames. For example in some exemplary embodiments, the available transmission power information includes transmission power backoff report information. For example, control factors y of table 6200 is a function of input value x, the most recent 5 bit uplink transmission power backoff report (ULTXBKF5). Control factors z of table 6200 is also a function of input value x, the most recent 5 bit uplink transmission power backoff report (ULTXBKF5).

In various embodiments, the reporting control factor is also function of another factor, said another factor being received from a base station, e.g., via a broadcast channel signal. For example, in some exemplary embodiments, the another factor is an interference report gain adjustment value. For example, in an exemplary embodiment using table 6200 of FIG. 62 to determine control factors y and z, the interference report adjust gain factor is the value of an uplink traffic channel rate flash assignment offset value (ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset), where the base station sector broadcasts the ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset in a downlink broadcast channel. The wireless terminal uses a received ulTCHrateFlashAssignment value to determine the adjusted generic beacon ratio report value, b, in accordance with b=b₀−ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset, where − is defined in the dB sense and where b₀ is the most recent generic beacon ratio report value. In some embodiments, the wireless terminal uses ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset equal to 0 dB until the wireless terminal receives the value from the broadcast channel.

In some embodiments, the reporting control factor is a function of the maximum number of frames of information that can be communicated in a segment. In some such embodiments, the maximum number of frames of information that can be communicated in a segment is a function of the highest rate option that the wireless terminal can support. For example, in table 6200 of FIG. 62, control factor z is a function of N_(max), the number of MAC frames that fit in a segment at the highest rate option that the wireless terminal can support R_(max), where there is a predetermined N_(max) value for each R_(max) value. Refer to column 6206 of table 6200. At different times, e.g., due to different channel conditions, the wireless terminal may support different maximum rates, and this affects the determination of the control factor z.

In various embodiments generating a reporting control factor includes determining an expected rate of transmission. In some such embodiments, the mapping includes quantizing differently depending on the rate of transmission. For example, the expected rate of transmission, in some embodiments, is the maximum rate of possible transmission, and the quantization of a request report is performed differently depending upon different expected transmission rates. For example, the quantization is different in request report tables 6300, 6500, 6700, and 6900 as a function of control parameter z, which is dependent upon the value of R_(max).

In some embodiments, mapping a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor includes selecting a reporting control factor type, e.g., y or z, as a function of an amount of backlog. For example, consider that the wireless terminal is using the request dictionary (RD reference number=1) with the format for ULRQST4 of table 6500 of FIG. 65, and the wireless terminal wants to report backlog information pertaining to the combination of request groups 1 and 3, e.g., N[1]+N[3] information, the wireless terminal use a first reporting control factor type, e.g. reporting control factor y, for lower levels of backlog and a second reporting control factor type z, for higher levels of backlog. In some embodiments, mapping a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor includes: selecting a reporting control factor type to use as a function of the type of information the wireless terminal wants to communicate. For example, in some embodiments, a wireless terminal may use a first reporting control factor type, e.g., reporting control factor y, when reporting backlog information pertaining to a first request group or set of request groups, e.g., request group 1 information, N[1], and a second reporting control factor type, e.g., reporting control factor z, when reporting backlog information pertaining to a second request group or set of request groups, e.g., the combination of request group 2 and 3, N[2]+N[3].

In some embodiments, the method further comprises step 7610, in which the wireless terminal maps another number of frames to be communicated to another report value, said mapping another number of frames including selecting not to apply a reporting control factor. In some such embodiments, selecting not to apply a reporting control factor is performed as a function of at least one of the type of information to be reported, e.g., request group or set of request groups, and the amount of backlog. For example, consider that the wireless terminal is using the request dictionary (RD reference number=1) with the format for ULRQST4 of table 6500 of FIG. 65, and the wireless terminal wants to report request group 2 backlog information, e.g., N[2] information, the wireless terminal does not use a reporting control factor, e.g., the wireless terminal does not use a value for reporting control factor y or z in determining the report value.

FIG. 77 comprising the combination of FIG. 77A, FIG. 77B and FIG. 77C is a drawing of a flowchart 7700 of an exemplary method of operating a wireless terminal, e.g., mobile node, to report transmission backlog information. The exemplary method starts in step 7702 and proceeds, in some embodiments, to step 7704 and/or step 7708. In step 7704, the wireless terminal stores reporting control factor mapping information, e.g., information mapping at least one of an interference report, e.g., a beacon ratio report, and a transmission power report, e.g., a transmission power backoff report, to at least one reporting control factor as a function of stored values resulting in mapping information for control factors 7706. For example, mapping information for control factors 7706, in is one exemplary embodiment, information represented by table 6200 of FIG. 62 which is used to determine reporting control factors y and z, and stored values include limit values used in the condition column 6202.

In step 7708, the wireless terminal stores transmission backlog report dictionary information (report dictionary 1 information 7710, . . . , report dictionary N information 7712, wherein at least one of the reports defined by at least one dictionary uses reporting control factors. For example, consider an exemplary embodiment using four report dictionaries represented by FIGS. 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69 and 70; the four bit uplink request report (ULRQST4) for each dictionary uses reporting control factors y and z.

Steps 7704 and/or 7708 are, in some embodiments performed as part of an initialization process for the wireless terminal, e.g., a factory load. Steps 7704 and/or 7708 are, in some embodiments, performed as part of an upgrade, e.g., an in-field upgrade as new request dictionaries become available. In some embodiments, mapping information for control factors 7706 and/or report dictionary information, e.g., one or more of (report dictionary 1 information 7710, . . . , report dictionary N information 7712) is preprogrammed in the wireless terminal, e.g., as part of software, hardware, and/or firmware, and the wireless terminal does not perform storing operations of steps 7704 and/or 7708.

Operation proceeds from step 7702 to steps 7714, 7720, 7726, 7732, 7738, and via connecting node A 7742 to step 7744. In step 7714, the wireless terminal maintains transmission backlog information, e.g., updating one or more request group queues (request group 1 queue backlog information 7716, . . . , request group N queue backlog information 7718), on an ongoing basis. For example, a number of uplink MAC frames of traffic channel information to be communicated in a particular request group are increased as more user data, e.g., input data, to be communicated via the uplink corresponding to the request group occurs; as frames of user data corresponding to a request group are successfully communicated, the number of uplink frames may be decremented accordingly; as a timeout expires the number of uplink frames may be decremented accordingly.

In step 7720, the wireless terminal determines wireless terminal transmission power levels, and then in step 7722 the wireless terminal generates transmission power reports, e.g., a transmission power backoff report, resulting in stored transmission power report information 7724. Steps 7720 and 7724 are performed on an ongoing basis.

In step 7726, the wireless terminal measures channel conditions, e.g., measuring received downlink broadcast signals such as pilot and/or beacon signals from one or more base station attachment points. Operation proceeds from step 7726 to step 7728, where the wireless terminal generates interference reports. For example, the wireless terminal generates a beacon ratio report using measurements from step 7726 corresponding to a serving base station sector transmitter and one or more other base station transmitters and using loading factor information. From the operation of step 7728 interference report information 7730 is determined, e.g., a generic beacon ratio report value, which is stored.

In step 7732, the wireless terminal monitors for a gain adjustment factor, e.g., a gain adjustment factor corresponding to the current serving base station attachment point, which is broadcast via a broadcast channel signal. Operation proceeds from step 7732 to step 7734, where the wireless terminal receives and stores the gain adjustment factor 7736. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, the gain adjustment factor is referred to as an uplink traffic channel rate flash assignment offset (ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset) value. In some embodiments, if the gain adjustment value is not received, a default value, e.g., 0 dB, is used for the gain adjustment value.

In step 7738, the wireless terminal identifies a report dictionary to use resulting in current report dictionary identification information 7740. Step 7738 is performed on an ongoing basis. In some embodiments, one of the reporting dictionaries is a default dictionary, and the report dictionary may be, and sometimes is, changed to a different report dictionary during ongoing operations, e.g., to better facilitate wireless terminal current reporting needs.

In step 7744, the wireless terminal determines whether the wireless terminal is to transmit an uplink transmission backlog report as a function of a reporting control factor. Current report dictionary identification information 7740 and report dictionary information (report dictionary 1 information 7710, . . . , report dictionary N information 7712) are used as input to step 7712. In some embodiments, some transmission backlog reports use reporting control factors while other transmission backlog reports do not use reporting control factors. For example 1 bit uplink request reports or 3 bit uplink request reports may not use reporting control factors while 4 bit uplink request reports may use reporting control factors. In some embodiments, some report dictionaries use reporting control factors while other report dictionaries do not use reporting control factors. Operations of step 7744 are performed by the wireless terminal on an ongoing basis.

For each report to be communicated by the wireless terminal which is to use a reporting control factor, the wireless terminal proceeds to step 7746. In step 7746, the wireless terminal generates at least one reporting control factor as a function of at least one of channel quality information, available transmission power information, device capability information, and quality of service information. Step 7746 includes sub-steps 7748, 7752, 7754, 7758, and 7762.

In sub-step 7748, the wireless terminal determines an adjusted interference report value 7750 using said interference report information 7730 and gain adjustment factor 7736. For example, consider an embodiment using the implementation of FIG. 62, the interference report information 7730 is the most recent generic beacon ratio report value b₀, the adjusted interference report value 7750 is the value of variable b, the gain adjustment factor 7736 is the received value of broadcast channel variable ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset, where b=b₀−ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset, and where “−” is in the dB sense.

Operation proceeds from sub-step 7748 to sub-step 7752. In step 7752 the wireless terminal determines a 1^(st) reporting control factor as a function of interference information and power information. In step 7752, the wireless terminal uses mapping information for control factors 7706, transmission report power information 7724, and adjusted interference report information 7750 to determine a 1^(st) control factor value 7764. For example, consider an embodiment using FIG. 62 information, the mapping information for control factors 7706 includes the 1^(st) column 6202 and the second column 6204, the transmission power report information 7724 is the value of the most recent transmission power backoff report referred to as the x value, the adjusted interference report value is the adjusted beacon ratio report value referred to as b value, and the 1^(st) control factor 7764 is the determined y value from column 6204 which satisfies the input conditions considered.

Operation proceeds from step 7752 to step 7754, where the wireless terminal determines a highest rate option supported by the wireless terminal, e.g., a highest rate option currently supported by the wireless terminal, referred to as R_(max) 7756. Operation proceeds from step 7754 to step 7758, where the wireless terminal uses the determined highest rate option R_(max) to determined a number of frames, e.g., number of MAC frames, corresponding to the determined highest rate option for a segment, e.g., an uplink traffic channel segment. The determination of step 7758 is referred to as N_(max).

Operation proceeds from step 7758 to step 7762. In step 7762, the wireless terminal determines a second reporting control factor as a function of interference information, power information, and the highest rate supported by the wireless terminal. In step 7762, the wireless terminal uses mapping information for control factors 7706, transmission report power information 7724, adjusted interference report information 7750, and maximum number of frames information 7760 to determine a 2^(nd) control factor value 7766. For example, consider an embodiment using FIG. 62 information, the mapping information for control factors 7706 includes the 1^(st) column 6202 and the third column 6206, the transmission power report information 7724 is the value of the most recent transmission power backoff report referred to as the x value, the adjusted interference report value is the adjusted beacon ratio report value referred to as b value, and the 2^(nd) control factor 7766 is the determined z value from column 6206 which satisfies the input conditions considered.

Operation proceeds from step 7746 via connecting node B 7768 to step 7770. In step 7770, the wireless terminal maps a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor. Step 7770 uses as input current report dictionary identification information 7740, report dictionary information 1 7710, . . . , report dictionary N information 7712, 1^(st) control factor value 7764, 2^(nd) control factor value 7766, and request group queue backlog information (request group 1 queue backlog information 7716, . . . , request group N backlog information 7718). For example, consider that the wireless terminal is currently using request dictionary with reference number=2 using the reporting format of FIG. 67 for 4 bit uplink request reports, that y=2, that the wireless terminal has a backlog of 4 frames in the request group with index number=2 such that N[2]=4, that the wireless terminal has a backlog of 2 frames in the request group with index number=3 such that N[3]=2; ceil (N[2]+N[3])/y=ceil (6/2)=3. Therefore in step 7770 the report value is set to the 4 bit pattern of 0b0111.

Operation proceeds from step 7770 to step 7772, where the wireless terminal transmits a transmission backlog report, e.g., a 4 bit uplink transmission backlog report, including said report value from step 7770, to a base station. For example, the backlog report with the report value of step 7770 is in some embodiments communicated via a dedicated control channel segment. In some embodiments, the backlog report is communicated with another report in the same segment.

FIG. 78 is a drawing of an exemplary wireless terminal 7800, e.g., mobile node, implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary wireless terminal 7800 includes a receiver module 7802, a transmitter module 7804, a processor 7806, user I/O devices 7808, and a memory 7810 coupled together via a bus 7812 over which the various elements may interchange data and information. Memory 7810 includes routines 7818 and data/information 7820. The processor 7806, e.g., a CPU, executes the routines 7818 and uses the data/information 7820 in memory 7810 to control the operation of the wireless terminal and implement methods.

The receiver module 7802, e.g., an OFDM receiver, is coupled to receive antenna 7803 via which the wireless terminal receives downlink signals from base stations. Downlink signals include, e.g., timing/synchronization signals such as beacon and pilot signals, registration signals, state transition signals, power control command signals, loading factor information signals, broadcast signals including gain adjustment signals, assignment signals and downlink traffic channel signals. Receiver module 7802 includes a decoder 7814 for decoding at least some of the received downlink signals.

The transmitter module 7804, e.g., an OFDM transmitter, is coupled to transmit antenna 7805, via which the wireless terminal transmits uplink signals to base stations. In some embodiments, the same antenna is used for transmitter and receiver. Transmitter module 7804 includes an encoder 7816 for encoding at least some of the uplink signals. Uplink signals include, e.g., registration request signals, dedicated control channel signals including uplink transmission backlog request report signals, interference reports, and power reports, and uplink traffic channel segment signals.

Routines 7818 include a communications routine 7822 and wireless terminal control routines 7824. The communications routine 7822 implements various communications protocols used by the wireless terminal. Wireless terminal control routines 7824 include a 1^(st) control factor generation module 7826, a 2^(nd) control factor generation module 7828, a mapping module 7830, a channel quality determination module 7832, a transmission power information generation module 7834, a maximum transmission rate determination module 7836, and an expected transmission rate determination module 7840.

1^(ST) control factor generation module 7826 generates a first control factor 7870 as a function of at least one of channel quality information, available transmission power information, device capability information and quality of service information. 2^(nd) control factor generation module 7828 generates a second control factor 7872 as a function of at least one of channel quality information, available transmission power information, device capability information and quality of service information. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, the first reporting control factor 7870 is the value of variable z in table 6200 of FIG. 62 and, the 1^(st) control factor generation module 7826 uses the information of column 6202 and 6206 of Table 6200, beacon ratio report information, transmission power backoff report information and maximum rate information to determine the value for reporting control factor z. Continuing with the example, the second reporting control factor 7872 is the value of variable y in table 6200 of FIG. 62 and, the 2^(nd) control factor generation module 7828 uses the information of column 6202 and 6204 of Table 6200, beacon ratio report information and transmission power backoff report information to determine the value for reporting control factor y.

Mapping module 7830 maps a number of frames, e.g., MAC frames, to be communicated to a report value as a function of at least one reporting control factor. Thus mapping module 7830 maps request group queue information, e.g., at least some of (request group 1 number of frames 7880, . . . , request group N number of frames 7882), to a request report determined value, in accordance with the request dictionary currently in use by the wireless terminal. Mapping module 7830 uses request dictionary information 7844 corresponding to the dictionary in use and at least one of 1^(st) reporting control factor 7870 and 2^(nd) reporting control factor 7872 to perform the mapping and determine the request report value 7884 to be communicated to the base station. In one exemplary embodiment, the request report is a 4 bit uplink request report (ULRQST4), the wireless terminal supports 4 different request dictionaries represented by FIGS. 63, 65, 67 and 69, the wireless terminal supports four uplink request groups having numbers of frames to be communicated N[0], N[1], N[2], N[3], respectively, and the control factors are represented by the values of variables y and z determined in accordance with FIG. 62. Thus mapping module 7830, for a given ULRQST4 report uses one of the request dictionaries, the wireless terminal and base station both being aware of the reporting dictionary being used by the wireless terminal for the report.

Channel quality determination module 7832 generates information including at least one of: uplink interference information 7854, downlink interference information 7858, uplink signal to noise information 7860 and downlink signal to noise information 7862. At least one of reporting control factor 7870 and/or reporting control factor 7872 determined by module 7826 and module 7828, respectively, is a function of channel quality information 7852 generated by the channel quality determination module 7832. In some embodiments, both reporting control factors 7870, 7872 are a function of channel quality information 7852.

Transmission power information generation module 7834 generates available transmission power information 7864, e.g., a wireless terminal transmission power backoff report value. At least one of reporting control factor 7870 and/or reporting control factor 7872 determined by module 7826 and module 7828, respectively, is a function of available transmission power information 7864 generated by module 7834. In some embodiments, both reporting control factors 7870, 7872 are a function of available transmission power information 7864.

Maximum transmission rate determination module 7836 determines a current highest rate option supported by the wireless terminal (information 7874), e.g., for an uplink traffic channel segment. At least one of reporting control factor 7870 and/or reporting control factor 7872 determined by module 7826 and module 7828, respectively, is a function of a maximum number of frames of information that can be communicated in a segment 7876 given the current highest rate option 7874 determined to be supported by the wireless terminal.

Expected rate transmission module 7840 determines the expected rate of transmission 7878, e.g., for one or more uplink traffic channel segment. In some embodiments generating at least one of a reporting control factor and a request report value is determined as a function of an expected rate of transmission. Thus, in some such embodiment the determined expected rate of transmission is used by at least one of modules 7826, 7828 and 7830.

Data/information 7820 includes mapping information for reporting control factors 7842, request dictionary information 7844, channel quality information 7852, available transmission power information 7864, device capability information 7866, quality of service information 7868, a 1^(st) reporting control factor 7870, a 2^(nd) reporting control factor 7872, a maximum transmission rate currently supported 7874, a current maximum number of frames/segment 7876, an expected rate of transmission 7878, request group 1 number of frames 7880, . . . , request group N number of frames 7882, and request report determined value 7884.

Mapping information for reporting control factors 7842 in one embodiment includes information of table 6200 of FIG. 62.

Request dictionary information 7884 includes one or more sets of request dictionary information (request dictionary 1 information 7846, . . . , request dictionary n information 7848). Request dictionary 1 information 7846 includes mapping information for request report 7850. In one exemplary embodiment request dictionary information 7844 includes information of table 6300 of FIG. 63, table 6500 of FIG. 65, table 6700 of FIG. 67 and table 6900 of FIG. 69. For example mapping information for request report 7850 may correspond to table 6300 of FIG. 63.

Channel quality information 7852 includes uplink interference information 7854, downlink interference information 7858, uplink signal to noise information 7860, and downlink signal to noise information 7862. Uplink interference information 7854 includes beacon ratio information 7856. Beacon ratio information 7856 includes beacon ratio report information, e.g., an uplink interference report value derived from beacon signals, pilot channel signals, and/or loading factor information, and an adjusted beacon ratio report value, the adjustment being as a function of a received broadcast gain adjustment signal.

Available transmission power information 7864, e.g., a wireless terminal transmission power backoff report value, is an output of module 7834 and used by at least one of control factor generation modules 7826, 7828.

Device capability information 7866 includes, e.g., uplink power capability information, supported uplink rate option information, types of input or inputs, e.g., voice, text, and/or image, buffering capability information, programs support information, concurrent session capability information, receiver strength information, transmitter strength information, frequency band capability information, number of transmitters, etc. Quality of service information 7868 includes, e.g., current estimated quality of service information, current measured quality of service information, and user subscription tier level of service.

1^(st) reporting control factor 7870 and 2^(nd) reporting control factors 7872 are outputs of module 7826, 7828, respectively and used as input by mapping module 7830 in determining a request report value. The use of reporting control factors greatly expands the reporting possibilities for a given fixed size report, e.g., a four bit report, of a given reporting dictionary, thus facilitating a wide range of reporting possibilities and a wide range of different quantization schemes. Thus the small size, e.g., 4 bit report, using control factors as input, can favorably accommodate a wide range of reporting possibilities.

Maximum rate currently supported 7874 identifying a maximum uplink rate option that the wireless terminal can currently accommodate is an output of maximum rate determination module 7836. In some exemplary embodiments, a determined current maximum rate option corresponds to a current maximum number of frames/segment 7876, e.g., MAC frames per uplink traffic channel segment, which is used by at least one of control factor generation modules 7826, 7828. Expected rate of transmission 7878 is an output of module 7840.

Request group 1 number of frames 7880, . . . , request group N number of frames 7882 indicate uplink transmission backlog information corresponding to different request group queues, e.g., counts of MAC frames awaiting to be transmitted for each of the request group queues. Request report determined value 7884 is an output of mapping module 7830, e.g., a 4 bit pattern to be communicated in a 4 bit uplink request report (ULRQST4 report).

FIG. 79 comprising the combination of FIG. 79A and FIG. 79B is a flowchart 7900 of an exemplary method of operating a base station in accordance with various embodiments. The exemplary method starts in step 7902, where the base station is powered on and initialized. Operation proceeds from step 7902 to step 7904. In step 7904, the base station broadcasts a value, e.g., a gain adjustment factor, to be used by wireless terminals in determining at least some reporting control factors. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, the gain adjustment factor, e.g., an uplink traffic channel rate flash assignment offset value, is broadcast as part of a broadcast channel in a recurring structure and is intended to adjust the value of the beacon ratio report.

Operation proceeds from step 7904 to step 7906. In step 7906, the base station receives an uplink interference report, e.g., a beacon ratio report, from a wireless terminal. Operation proceeds from step 7906 to step 7908. In step 7908, the base station receives a transmission power report, e.g., a wireless terminal transmission power backoff report, from said wireless terminal. Operation proceeds from step 7908 to step 7910. In step 7910, the base station receives a transmission backlog report from said wireless terminal, e.g., a four bit uplink request report, said transmission backlog report communicating a report value, e.g. a multi-bit report value. For example, in an exemplary embodiment where the transmission backog report is a four bit uplink request report (ULRQST4) the report value may be one of 16 possibilities. In some embodiments, each of received interference report, transmission power report and transmission backlog report from the wireless terminal are received over the same dedicated control channel allocated to the wireless terminal, e.g., each report being conveyed in different dedicated control channel segments but using the same logical dedicated control channel tone.

Operation proceeds from step 7910 to step 7912. In step 7912, the base station determines a reporting control factor or factors corresponding to said received transmission backlog report, said reporting control factor being a function of at least one of channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information. In some embodiments, the channel quality information includes at least one of uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information. In step 7912, the base station is attempting to determine the same reporting control factor, e.g., type of reporting control factor and value for the reporting control factor, that was used by the wireless terminal in generating the transmission backlog report which was received and is being processed. In one exemplary embodiment, the base station uses the information of table 6200 of FIG. 62 to determine the value for at least one of control factors y and z given the inputs derived from the received uplink interference report of step 7906 and the received transmission power report of step 7908.

In some embodiments, determining a reporting control factor in step 7912 includes determining a reporting control factor type from among a plurality of reporting control factor types as a function of a bit pattern of at least a portion of the received report value. For example, consider that the base station has implemented 4 bit uplink request dictionary mapping of table 6500 of FIG. 65, and that the report value is one of 0101, 0110, 0111, 1000, then report control factor type y is used. Alternatively, if the report value is one of 1001, 1010, 1011, 1100, 1101, 1110 and 1111, then reporting control factor type z is used. In some embodiment, the format for a report of a dictionary may be partitioned such that the type of reporting control factor being used can be determined by considering the value of a portion of the bits of the report value, e.g., half of the possible report values may correspond to use of a first type of report value, e.g., y, and a second half of the possible report values may correspond to use of a second type of report value, e.g., z, and one bit, e.g., the most significant bit of the report value can be used to determine the type of reporting control factor.

In some embodiments, step 7912 includes sub-step 7914. In sub-step 7914, the base station estimates the maximum number of frames of information that the wireless terminal will be able to communicate in a segment if said segment is allocated to said wireless terminal. For example, consider that the base station uses information of Table 6200 of FIG. 62, if the base station is attempting to determine the value of control factor z, the base station calculates a value for N_(max), and uses that value in determining reporting control factor z. Alternatively, if the base station needs to determine the value of control factor y, but not z, then step 7914 is skipped.

Operation proceeds from step 7912 to step 7916. In step 7916, the base station interprets said received report value as a function of said determined reporting control factor. For example, in some exemplary embodiments, the base station determines the reporting dictionary in use by the wireless terminal, and then using the determined report dictionary mapping information and determined reporting control factor the base station interprets the report value, e.g., the report value represented by a pattern of 4 bits. In one exemplary embodiment, the base station uses the report dictionary mapping information of one of table 6300 of FIG. 63, table 65 of FIG. 65, table 6700 of FIG. 67, and table 6900 of FIG. 69 and reporting control factor value corresponding to one of reporting control parameter y or z to interpret a 4 bit bit pattern of the 4 bit uplink request report.

Step 7916 includes step 7918. In step 7918, the base station determines backlog information of frames to be transmitted by said wireless terminal. For example, consider an embodiment using the report dictionaries of FIGS. 63, 65, 67, and 69; in that embodiment information about four request group queues is represented by frame count information N[0], N[1], N[2]; and N[3], which is recovered from an interpretation of the report value.

Operation proceeds from step 7916 via connecting node A 7920 to step 7922. In step 7922, the base station receives a second transmission backlog report from said wireless terminal, said second transmission backlog report communicating a second report value, said second transmission backlog report being of the same type as said transmission backlog report, e.g., both reports are 4 bit uplink request reports (ULRQST4) reports in a recurring dedicated control channel structure.

Then, in step 7924, the base station determines a reporting control factor corresponding to said second received report, said reporting control factor corresponding to said second received report being a function of at least one of channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information. Then, in step 7926, the base station interprets said received second report value as a function of said determined second reporting control factor. Step 7926 includes step 7928 in which the base station determines backlog information of frames to be transmitted by said wireless terminal.

In some embodiments, wherein the first and second reporting values are the same but wherein control factor values are different, interpreting said received second reporting value determines different backlog information of frames to be transmitted by said wireless terminal than interpreting said received first report value. For example, consider that the base station has implemented control factor mapping of table 6200 of FIG. 62 and 4 bit uplink request dictionary mapping of table 6500 of FIG. 65. Further consider that the wireless terminal has transmitted another one of at least one of uplink interference report and transmission power report prior to step 7922 resulting in a different value for reporting control factor (y) corresponding to first and second ULRQST4 reports and that the first and second received ULRQST4 reports (of steps 7910 and 7922) respectively, have communicated the same bit pattern 0101. In one case where reporting control factor y=1, the base station interprets the bit pattern as communicating that ceil((N[1]+N[3])/1)=1; therefore N[1]+N[3]=1. In the other case where reporting control factor y=2, the base station interprets the bit pattern as communicating that ceil((N[1]+N[3])/2)=1; therefore N[1]+N[3]=2 or N[1]+N[3]=1.

Now consider that the reporting control factor variable was z of FIG. 62, reporting control parameter z can, at any given time for a wireless terminal has one of ten different values (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10) as a function of a beacon ratio report value, a transmission power backoff report value, and a maximum number of frames (Nmax). Thus for a given bit pattern for a given reporting dictionary, e.g., bit pattern 1001 of reporting dictionary of FIG. 65, ten different interpretations are possible.

It should be appreciated that the use of reporting control factors can vastly increase the reporting possibilities and possible quantization schemes available for such a small number of bits in a report, e.g., a four bit report with respect to a fixed reporting scheme. It should also be appreciated that the beacon ratio report and transmission power backoff report utilized by the wireless terminal and base station, are implemented and utilized for purposes other than generating a reporting control factor, thus those reports do not represent additional overhead signaling, but can be conveniently used to enhance backlog reporting possibilities.

In some embodiments, steps 7930, 7932 and 7934 are performed. Operation proceeds from step 7926 to step 7930. In step 7930, the base station receives a third transmission backlog report from said wireless terminal, said third transmission backlog report communicating a third report value, said third transmission backlog report being of the same type as said transmission backlog report, e.g., an-ULRQST4 report. Operation proceeds from step 7930 to step 7932. In step 7932, the base station determines to interpret said received third report value without using a reporting control factor, said decision to interpret without using a reporting control factor being performed as a function of a bit pattern of a least a portion of said received third report value. For example, consider that the base station has implemented 4 bit uplink request dictionary mapping of table 6500 of FIG. 65, and that the third report value is one of 0000, 0001, 0010, 0011 and 0100. In such a situation, the base station does not use a reporting control factor, e.g., y or z value, to interpret the report. The base station, in some embodiments, determines that a reporting control factor is not used by checking the bit pattern of the report value. In some embodiments, the use or non-use of a reporting control factor is intentionally partitioned such that the use or non-use of a reporting control factor can be determined by examining some but not all of the bits of the report, e.g., half of the possible report values for an exemplary report of an exemplary dictionary may correspond to non-use of a reporting control factor and half of the possible report value may correspond to use of a reporting control factor. In some such exemplary embodiments, the base station by examining the value of one bit of the report value, e.g., the most significant bit, can determine whether or not a reporting control factor is being used. Operation proceeds from step 7932 to step 7934. In step 7934, the base station interprets said received third report value without using a reporting control factor, e.g., said interpreting including determining backlog information of frames to be transmitted by said wireless terminal.

FIG. 80 comprising the combination of FIG. 80A, FIG. 80B and FIG. 80C is a flowchart 8000 of an exemplary method of operating a base station in accordance with various embodiments. Operation of the exemplary method starts in step 8002, where the base station is powered on and initialized and proceeds to steps 8004, 8008, 8014, 8020, and 8026.

In step 8004, the base station broadcasts a value, e.g., a gain adjustment value, to be used by wireless terminal in determining at least some reporting control factors. Step 8006 uses gain adjustment factor information 8006 as input. For example, in one exemplary embodiment the gain adjustment factor is referred to as an uplink traffic channel rate flash assignment offset (ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset) value and is broadcast as one of a plurality of different variables in a broadcast channel in a recurring timing/frequency channel structure used by the base station. Step 8004 is performed on an ongoing basis.

In step 8008, the base station maintains, on an ongoing basis, report dictionary usage information (current report dictionary identification information for WT 1 8010, . . . , current report dictionary identification information for WT N 8012). In one exemplary embodiment, the base stations supports four different reporting dictionaries including a default reporting dictionary, and at any given time a wireless terminal using an attachment point of the base station uses one of the four dictionaries, the wireless terminal and base station both having knowledge of the report dictionary in use corresponding to an uplink backlog report being communicated.

In step 8014, the base station receives, on an ongoing basis, uplink interference reports, e.g., beacon ratio reports, from wireless terminals. Step 8014 results in received interference report information, e.g., beacon ratio report information, (interference report information for wireless terminal 1 8016, . . . , interference report information for wireless terminal N 8018.

In step 8020, the base station receives, on an ongoing basis, transmission power reports, e.g., wireless terminal transmission power backoff reports, from wireless terminals. Step 8020 results in received power report information (power report information for wireless terminal 1 8022, . . . , power report information for wireless terminal N 8024).

In step 8026, the wireless terminal receives, on an ongoing basis, transmission backlog reports, e.g., 4 bit uplink request reports (ULRQST4) from wireless terminals. Step 8026 results in received backlog report values (backlog report value for WT 1 8028, . . . , backlog report value for WT N 8030). For each received backlog report value to be interpreted operation proceeds from step 8026 via connecting node A 8032 to step 8034.

In step 8034, the base station determines a reporting control factor or factors corresponding to a received transmission backlog report, said report control factor being a function of at least one of channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information. Step 8034 includes sub-steps 8036, 8040, 8050 and 8052.

In sub-step 8036, the base station adjusts the received interference information, interference report information for WT i 8035 using gain adjustment factor information 8006 and obtains adjusted interference report information for WT i 8038. For example, input information WT i 8035 is one of (interference report information for WT 1 8016, . . . , interference report information 8018), where the value of i matches the index of the WT which transmitted the backlog report being interpreted to which the control factors being determined correspond.

Operation proceeds from sub-step 8036 to sub-step 8040. In sub-step 8040, the base station estimates the maximum number of frames of information that WT i will be able to communicate in a segment, e.g., an uplink traffic channel segment, if the segment is allocated to WT i. Sub-step 8040 includes sub-step 8042 and 8046. In sub-step 8042, the base station determines an expected maximum rate option, R_(max) 8044, and in step 8046, the base station uses the determined maximum rate option to determine a number of frames, N_(max) 8048, corresponding to the R_(max).

Operation proceeds from sub-step 8040 to sub-step 8050. In sub-step 8050, the base station determines a 1^(st) reporting control factor, y 8051, as a function of interference report information and power report information. The power report information used as input in sub-step 8050 is power report information for WT i 8049 which is one of (power report information for WT 1 8022, . . . , power report information for WT N 8024), where the value of i matches the index of the WT which transmitted the backlog report being interpreted to which the control factors being determined correspond. The interference report information used as input in sub-step 8050 is adjusted interference report information for WT i 8038. In one exemplary embodiment, the first control factor value y is determined in accordance with first column 6202 and second column 6204 of table 6200 of FIG. 62. For example, the value of y 8051 can be either 1 or 2.

Operation proceeds from sub-step 8050 to sub-step 8052. In sub-step 8052, the base station determines a 2^(nd) reporting control factor, z 8053, as a function of interference report information, power report information and rate information. The power report information used as input in sub-step 8052 is power report information for WT i 8049 which is one of (power report information for WT 1 8022, . . . , power report information for WT N 8024), where the value of i matches the index of the WT which transmitted the backlog report being interpreted to which the control factors being determined correspond. The interference report information used as input in sub-step 8050 is adjusted interference report information for WT i 8038. N_(max) 8048 which is based on rate information is also used as input to sub-step 8052. In one exemplary embodiment, the second control factor value z is determined in accordance with first column 6202 and third column 6206 of table 6200 of FIG. 62. For example, the value of z 8053 can be one of the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10}.

Operation proceeds from step 8034 via connecting node B 8054 to step 8056. In step 8056, the base station interprets the received report value as a function of determined reporting control factor(s). Step 8056 includes sub-step 8058 and 8062. In sub-step 8058, the base station identifies the report dictionary information to use for interpretation. The base station includes one or more sets of report dictionary information (report dictionary 1 information 8064, . . . , report dictionary N information 8066) from which the base station selects based on the value of current report dictionary identification information for WT i 8068. Current report dictionary information for WT i 8068 is the one of (current report dictionary 1D for WT 1 8010, . . . , current report dictionary 1D for WT N 8012), where the value of i the value of the wireless terminal index from which the backlog report being processed corresponds. The output of step 8058 is identified report dictionary information 8060. For example in one exemplary embodiment in which the base station supports four report dictionaries, information 8060 corresponds to one of table 6300 of FIG. 63, table 6500 of FIG. 65, table 6700 of FIG. 67 and table 6900 of FIG. 69.

Operation proceeds from sub-step 8058 to sub-step 8062. In sub-step 8062, the base station determines backlog information of frames to be transmitted by WT i. Sub-step 8062 uses as input: backlog report value for WT i 8070, reporting control factor y value 8051, reporting control factor z value 8053, and identified report dictionary information 8060. Backlog report value for WT i 8070 is one of (received backlog report value for WT 1 8028 . . . , received backlog report value for WT N 8030), where the value of i is the value of the wireless terminal index from which the backlog report being processed corresponds. Determined backlog information, e.g., corresponding to one or more request groups, 8063 is output from step 8063. For example, consider that the identified report dictionary information 8060 corresponds to table 6500 of FIG. 65, backlog report value 8070 is the 4 bit pattern 0111, y=2 and z=7. In such a case the determined backlog information is : ceil ((N[1]+N[3])/2=3 or, in other wireless the combination of request group 1 and request group 3 has a backlog of 5 or 6 frames, e.g., MAC frames, to communicate. Alternatively, consider that the identified report dictionary information 8060 corresponds to table 6500 of FIG. 65, backlog report value 8070 is the 4 bit pattern 0111, y=1 and z=4. In such a case the determined backlog information is : ceil ((N[1]+N[3])/1=3 or, in other wireless the combination of request group 1 and request group 3 has a backlog of 3 frames, e.g., MAC frames, to communicate. Alternatively, consider that the identified report dictionary information 8060 corresponds to table 6500 of FIG. 65, backlog report value 8070 is the 4 bit pattern 1101, y=2 and z=6. In such a case the determined backlog information is: ceil ((N[]+N[3])/6=6 or, in other wireless the combination of request group 1 and request group 3 has a backlog of 36 or 35 or 34 or 33 or 32 or 31 frames, e.g., MAC frames, to communicate. Alternatively, consider that the identified report dictionary information 8060 corresponds to table 6500 of FIG. 65, backlog report value 8070 is the 4 bit pattern 1101, y=1 and z=4. In such a case the determined backlog information is: ceil ((N[1]+N[3])/4=6 or, in other wireless the combination of request group 1 and request group 3 has a backlog of 24 or 23 or 22 or 21 or 20 or 19 frames, e.g., MAC frames, to communicate. Thus, as may be observed, the use of control factors allows multiple interpretations of a 4 bit uplink request report corresponding to the same request dictionary and facilitates variations in quantization schemes.

FIG. 81 is a drawing of an exemplary base station 8100 implemented in accordance with various embodiments. Exemplary base station 8100 includes a receiver module 8102, a transmitter module 8104, a processor 8106, an I/O interface 8108, and a memory 8110 coupled together via a bus 8112 via which the various elements interchange data and information. Memory 8110 includes routines 8118 and data/information 8120. The processor 8106, e.g., a CPU, executes the routines 8118 and uses the data/information 8120 in memory 8110 to control the operation of the base station 8100 and implement methods.

Receiver module 8102, e.g., an OFDM receiver, is coupled to receive antenna 8103 via which the base station receives uplink signals from wireless terminals, e.g., from wireless terminal 7800. Receiver module 8102 includes a decoder 8114 for decoding at least some of the received uplink signals. Received uplink signals include registration signals, dedicated control channel signals, timing control signals, and uplink traffic channel signals. The dedicated control channel signals include transmission backlog reports such as a 4 bit uplink request report (ULRQST4), interference reports such as beacon ratio reports and transmission power reports such as a wireless terminal transmission power backoff report.

Transmitter module 8104, e.g., an OFDM transmitter, is coupled to transmit antenna 8105 via which the base station 8100 transmits downlink signals to wireless terminals. Transmitter module 8104 includes an encoder 8116 for encoding at least some of the transmitted downlink signals. Downlink signals include timing/synchronization signals, registration signals, assignment signals, downlink traffic channel signals and broadcast channel signals. The broadcast channel signals include a parameter used by wireless terminals in determining a reporting control factor, e.g., a gain adjustment parameter. For example, in one exemplary embodiment the gain adjustment parameter, referred to as a ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset parameter value, is used by wireless terminals in scaling a beacon ratio report value to obtain an adjusted beacon ratio report value, the adjusted beacon ratio report value used an input in determining a reporting control factor.

I/O interface 8108 couples the base station 8100 to other network nodes, e.g., other base stations, routers, AAA nodes, home agent nodes, etc. and/or the Internet. Thus I/O interface 8108, by coupling base station 8100 to a backhaul network, allows a wireless terminal using an attachment point of base station 8100 to participate in a communications session with a peer node using an attachment point of a different base station.

Routines 8118 include a communications routine 8122 and base station control routines 8124. The communications routines 8122 implement various communications protocols used by the base station 8100. The base station control routines 8124 include a scheduler module 8126, a reporting control factor determination module 8128, a report interpretation module 8130, an interference report recovery module 8132, a wireless terminal transmission power report recovery module 8134, a wireless terminal rate determination module 8136, a broadcast control module 8138 and a report dictionary module 8140.

Scheduler module 8126 schedules air link resources to wireless terminals using an attachment point of base station 8100 in accordance with a scheduling policy. The air link resources include downlink and uplink traffic channel segments. The scheduler module 8126 uses information derived from received transmission backlog reports in deciding which uplink traffic channel segments are assigned to which wireless terminals.

Reporting control factor determination module 8128 determines values of reporting control factors, a reporting control factor being a function of at least one of channel quality information, wireless terminal available power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information. In some embodiments, wherein said reporting control factor determination module 8128 determines said reporting control factor as a function of channel quality information, the channel quality information includes at least one of uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information. Reporting control factor determination module 8128 includes a 1^(st) control factor sub-module 8142 and a second control factor sub-module 8144. 1st reporting control factor sub-module 8142 determines values of 1^(st) reporting control factors, e.g., determined 1^(st) control factor 8176 for WT 1. 2nd reporting control factor sub-module 8144 determines values of 2^(nd) reporting control factors, e.g., determined 2^(nd) control factor 8178 for WT 1. For example, in one exemplary embodiment the two reporting control factors are y and z of table 6200 of FIG. 62 and reporting control factor determination module 8128 determines values for y and z for a wireless terminal from which it is receiving transmission backlog reports, e.g., ULRQST4 reports, in accordance with table 6200.

Report interpretation module 8130 determines backlog information relating to frames to be communicated by a wireless terminal which transmitted a received backlog report. For example, for WT 1, corresponding to received transmission backlog report 8150 the base station obtains a report value 8168, e.g., an integer value in the range of 0 . . . 15 corresponding to a 4 bit pattern of a received ULRQST4 report from WT1, and interprets the report as a function of determined control factors, e.g., y and/or z reporting control factor values, to determine interpreted transmission backlog report information 8156. In various embodiments, the base station 8100 supports a plurality of different reporting dictionaries and the report interpretation module 8130 uses the current dictionary for the WT to interpret a report. For example, in one exemplary embodiment, the base station 8100 supports 4 report dictionaries for ULRQST4 report interpretation represented by the information of table 6300 of FIG. 63, table 6500 of FIG. 65, table 6700 of FIG. 67 and table 6900 of FIG. 69. The base station report interpretation module 8130 using the appropriate one of the request dictionaries, determined report control factors, and an input report value, determines information pertaining to request group queues frame count information. For example, consider that the request dictionary if the one of table 6500, the report value=0110, and control factor y=2, the report interpretation module determines that ceil((N[1]+N[3])/y)=2, or in other words the combination of request group 1 and request group 3, for the wireless terminal, has 3 or 4 MAC frames in backlog to be transmitted.

Interference report recovery module 8132, e.g., a beacon ratio report recovery module, recovers interference reports and interference report information from wireless terminals, e.g., interference report 8152 from WT 1 and corresponding interference report information 8170, e.g., a beacon ratio report value. Interference report information 8170 is used as an input by the control factor determination module 8128, e.g., the interference report information 8170 is the value of the variable b₀ with reference to table 6200 of FIG. 62, the value b₀ is adjusted by a gain adjustment sub-module within reporting control factor determination module 8128 using gain adjustment factor 8190, and the value of b is obtained which is used in determining reporting control factors y and z.

Wireless terminal transmission power report recovery module 8134 recovers transmission power reports, e.g., transmission power backoff reports, from WTs and determines power report information, e.g. wireless terminal transmission power availability information. For example corresponding to WT 1, recovery module 8134 recovers report 8154 and obtains power report information 8174. The power report information 8174 is used as an input by the control factor determination module 8128, e.g., the power report information is the value of the variable x in table 6200 of FIG. 62.

Broadcast control module 8138 controls the broadcast of broadcast communications channel parameters including a gain adjustment factor 8190. The gain adjustment factor parameter value 8190, e.g., the value of the ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset parameter described with respect to FIG. 62, is used by wireless terminals in determining reporting control factors. The base station 8100 is aware of the broadcast gain adjustment parameter, and the reporting control factor determination module 8128 also uses the gain adjustment factor 8190 in determining corresponding control factors, e.g., an adjusted interference report value 8172 is obtained from an interference report value 8170.

Wireless terminal rate determination module 8136 determines rate options corresponding to wireless terminals, e.g., a maximum rate option that the wireless terminal is to use for an uplink traffic channel segment. In some embodiments, the rate determination module 8136 also determines a maximum number of frames, e.g., MAC frames, corresponding to the determined rate option. In some embodiments, a separate module is used for determining a maximum number of frames information. In the exemplary embodiment, at least some of the reporting control factors determined by module 8128 are determined as a function of current maximum rate option information for a wireless terminal. For example, in one exemplary embodiment the maximum frame information, e.g., an N_(max) value, derived from a determined current maximum rate option, e.g., a R_(max) value, for a wireless terminal is used by reporting control factor determination module 8128 for determining the value of reporting control factor parameter z of table 6200 of FIG. 62.

Report dictionary module 8140 maintains current report dictionary identification information 8146, e.g., WT 1 current request dictionary identification information, corresponding to wireless terminals using a base station 8100 attachment point. Thus module 8140 tracks the current report dictionary in use by a wireless terminal such that the base station can use the appropriate request dictionary when report interpretation module 8130 interprets a transmission backlog report value.

Data/information 8120 includes a plurality of sets of wireless terminal data/information (WT 1 data/information 8145, . . . , WT N data/information 8147), a plurality of reporting dictionary information (request dictionary 1 information 8184, . . . , request dictionary N information 8186), report control factor mapping information 8188, and a gain adjustment factor 8190. In one exemplary embodiment the base station 8100 supports 4 request dictionaries, and the report dictionary information includes the information of tables 6300 of FIG. 63, table 6500 of FIG. 65, table 6700 of FIG. 67 and table 6900 of FIG. 69. Report control mapping information 8188 includes, e.g., information included in table 6200 of FIG. 62 used to derive reporting control factors y and z. Gain adjustment factor 8190, e.g., a parameter such as a ulTCHrateFlashAssignmentOffset parameter, used by both WTs and BS 8100 in determining a reporting control factor, is broadcast under control of broadcast control module 8140 via transmitter module 8104 over a broadcast communications channel.

WT 1 data/information 8145 includes current request dictionary identification information 8146, received reports 8148, interpreted transmission backlog report information 8156, a plurality of request group frame information (request group 0 frame information 8158, . . . , request group N frame information 8160), device capability information 8162, quality of service information 8164, other quality information 8166, report value 8168, interference report information 8170, adjusted interference report information 8172, power report information 8174, a determined 1^(st) control factor 8176, a determined 2^(nd) control factor 8178, maximum rate information 8180, and maximum number of frames information 8182.

Received reports 8148 includes transmission backlog report 8150, interference report 8152, and wireless terminal transmission power report 8154. In one exemplary embodiment the transmission backlog report is a 4 bit uplink traffic request report (ULRQST4), the interference report is a 4 bit downlink beacon ratio report (DLBNR4), and the wireless terminal power report is a 5 bit uplink transmit backoff report (ULTxBKF5) or a 4 bit uplink transmit backoff report (ULTxBKF4). Report value 8168, e.g., an integer value or bit pattern conveyed by the information bits or bits of the report such as the four bit pattern 0110, corresponds to received transmission backlog report 8150. Interference report information 8170, e.g., a value in dB obtained from received interference report 8152, is, e.g., one of the values of table 2900 of FIG. 29 in the range of −3 db to 26 db.

Adjusted interference report information 8172, represents the combination of the interference report information 8170 value and the gain adjustment factor 8190 value. Power report information 8174 is obtained from received wireless terminal transmission power report, e.g., a value of an ULTxBKF5 report of table 2600 of FIG. 26 in the range of 6.5 db to 40 dBs.

Determined 1^(st) control factor 8176 is an output of 1^(st) control factor sub-module 8142 while determined 2^(nd) control factor 8178 is an output of 2^(nd) control factor sub-module 8144. In one exemplary embodiment the two reporting control factors are represented by the variables y and z of table 6200 of FIG. 62.

Interpreted transmission backlog report information 8156 is an output of report interpretation module 8130, e.g., counts of MAC frames of information to be transmitted in uplink traffic channel segments by WT 1 corresponding to one or more request groups. Request group 0 frame information 8158 includes the base station's estimate of the number of frames corresponding to request group 0 in backlog for WT 1; request group N frame information 8160 includes the base station's estimate of the number of frames corresponding to request group N in backlog for WT 1. Request group frame information (8158, . . . , 8160) is updated based upon interpreted transmission backlog report information 8156.

Device capability information 8162 includes, e.g., uplink power capability information, supported uplink rate option information, types of input or inputs, e.g., voice, text, and/or image, buffering capability information, programs support information, concurrent session capability information, receiver strength information, transmitter strength information, frequency band capability information, number of transmitters, etc. Quality of service information 8164 includes, e.g., current estimated quality of service information, current measured quality of service information, and user subscription tier level of service. Other quality information 8166 includes downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information.

WT 1 data/information 8145 also includes information identifying segments, e.g., uplink traffic channel segments assigned by the base station's scheduler 8126 to WT 1. In addition data/information 8145 also includes user data, e.g., voice, audio, image, text, and/or file data, received and/or transmitted via traffic channel segments assigned to WT 1, e.g., MAC frames of user data from WT 1 intended for a peer node of WT 1, received via uplink traffic channel segments assigned to WT1.

The techniques of various embodiments may be implemented using software, hardware and/or a combination of software and hardware. Various embodiments are directed to apparatus, e.g., mobile nodes such as mobile terminals, base stations, communications system. It is also directed to methods, e.g., method of controlling and/or operating mobile nodes, base stations and/or communications systems, e.g., hosts. Various embodiments are also directed to machine readable medium, e.g., ROM, RAM, CDs, hard discs, etc., which include machine readable instructions for controlling a machine to implement one or more steps.

In various embodiments nodes described herein are implemented using one or more modules to perform the steps corresponding to one or more methods, for example, signal processing, message generation and/or transmission steps. Thus, in some embodiments various features are implemented using modules. Such modules may be implemented using software, hardware or a combination of software and hardware. Many of the above described methods or method steps can be implemented using machine executable instructions, such as software, included in a machine readable medium such as a memory device, e.g., RAM, floppy disk, etc. to control a machine, e.g., general purpose computer with or without additional hardware, to implement all or portions of the above described methods, e.g., in one or more nodes. Accordingly, among other things, various embodiments are directed to a machine-readable medium including machine executable instructions for causing a machine, e.g., processor and associated hardware, to perform one or more of the steps of the above-described method(s).

While described in the context of an OFDM system, at least some of the methods and apparatus of various embodiments are applicable to a wide range of communications systems including many non-OFDM and/or non-cellular systems.

Numerous additional variations on the methods and apparatus of the various embodiments described above will be apparent to those skilled in the art in view of the above description. Such variations are to be considered within the scope. The methods and apparatus of the embodiments may be, and in various embodiments are, used with CDMA, orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM), and/or various other types of communications techniques which may be used to provide wireless communications links between access nodes and mobile nodes. In some embodiments the access nodes are implemented as base stations which establish communications links with mobile nodes using OFDM and/or CDMA. In various embodiments the mobile nodes are implemented as notebook computers, personal data assistants (PDAs), or other portable devices including receiver/transmitter circuits and logic and/or routines, for implementing the methods. 

1. A method of reporting transmission backlog information, comprising: generating at least one reporting control factor as a function of at least one of channel quality information, available transmission power information, device capability information and quality of service information; and mapping a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information; and wherein said channel quality information includes at least one of uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information.
 3. The method of claim 1, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information; and wherein said channel quality information includes uplink interference information.
 4. The method of claim 3, wherein the uplink interference information includes beacon ratio information.
 5. The method of claim 1, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of available transmission power information; and wherein said available transmission power information includes information indicating the amount of transmission power available for transmission of information including at least said frames.
 6. The method of claim 1, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of a maximum number of frames of information that can be communicated in a segment.
 7. The method of claim 6, wherein the maximum number of frames of information that can be communicated in a segment is a function of the highest rate option that the wireless terminal can support.
 8. The method of claim 1, wherein generating control factor includes determining an expected rate of transmission.
 9. The method of claim 8, wherein said mapping includes quantizing differently depending on the expected rate of transmission.
 10. The method of claim 1, further comprising: storing information mapping at least one of an interference report and a transmission power report to at least one reporting control factor as a function of stored values.
 11. The method of claim 10, wherein said interference report is a beacon ration report and said transmission power report is a transmission power backoff report, and said stored values includes conditional limit values.
 12. The method of claim 2, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of another factor, said another factor being received from a base station.
 13. The method of claim 12, wherein said another factor is an interference report gain adjustment value.
 14. The method of claim 12, wherein said interference report gain adjustment factor is an uplink traffic channel rate flash assignment offset.
 15. The method of claim 1, wherein said mapping a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor includes: selecting a reporting control factor type to use from a plurality of reporting control factor types as a function of an amount of backlog.
 16. The method of claim 1, wherein said mapping a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor includes: selecting a reporting control factor type to use from a plurality of reporting control factor types as a function of the type of information the wireless terminal wants to report.
 17. The method of claim 1, further comprising: mapping another number of frames to be communicated to another report value, said mapping another number of frames including selecting not to apply a reporting control factor.
 18. The method of claim 17, wherein said selecting not to apply a reporting control factor is performed as a function of at least one of the type of information to be reported and the amount of backlog.
 19. A wireless terminal, comprising: a first control factor generation module for generating a first control factor as a function of at least one of channel quality information, available transmission power information, device capability information and quality of service information; and a mapping module for mapping a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor.
 20. The wireless terminal of claim 19, further comprising: a channel quality determination module for generating information including at least one of uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information; and wherein said reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information generated by said channel quality determination module.
 21. The wireless terminal of claim 20, wherein the uplink interference information generated by said channel quality determination module includes beacon ratio information.
 22. The wireless terminal of claim 19, further comprising: a transmission power information generation module for generating available transmission power information; and wherein said reporting control factor is a function of generated available transmission power information.
 23. The wireless terminal of claim 19, further comprising: a transmission rate determination module for determining a current highest rate option supported by the wireless terminal; and wherein said reporting control factor is a function of a maximum number of frames of information that can be communicated in a segment given the current highest rate option determined to be supported by the wireless terminal.
 24. The wireless terminal of claim 19, further comprising: an expected transmission rate determination module; and wherein generating control factor includes determining an expected rate of transmission.
 25. The wireless terminal of claim 19, further comprising: stored mapping information mapping at least one of an interference report value and a transmission power report value to a reporting control factor value.
 26. A wireless terminal, comprising: control factor generation means for generating a first control factor as a function of at least one of channel quality information, available transmission power information, device capability information and quality of service information; and mapping means for mapping a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor.
 27. The wireless terminal of claim 26, further comprising: channel quality determination means for generating information including at least one of uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information; and wherein said reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information generated by said channel quality determination module.
 28. The wireless terminal of claim 27, wherein the uplink interference information generated by said channel quality determination module includes beacon ratio information.
 29. The wireless terminal of claim 26, further comprising: transmission power information generation means for generating available transmission power information; and wherein said reporting control factor is a function of generated available transmission power information.
 30. The wireless terminal of claim 26, further comprising: transmission rate determination means for determining a current highest rate option supported by the wireless terminal; and wherein said reporting control factor is a function of a maximum number of frames of information that can be communicated in a segment given the current highest rate option determined to be supported by the wireless terminal.
 31. The wireless terminal of claim 26, further comprising: expected transmission rate determination means for determining an expected rate of data transmission; and wherein generating control factor includes determining an expected rate of data transmission.
 32. The wireless terminal of claim 26, further comprising: means for storing mapping information mapping at least one of an interference report value and a transmission power report value to a reporting control factor value.
 33. A computer readable medium embodying machine executable instructions for controlling a wireless terminal to perform a method of reporting transmission backlog information, the comprising: generating at least one reporting control factor as a function of at least one of channel quality information, available transmission power information, device capability information and quality of service information; and mapping a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor.
 34. The computer readable medium of claim 33, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information; and wherein said channel quality information includes at least one of uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information.
 35. The computer readable medium of claim 33, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information; and wherein said channel quality information includes uplink interference information.
 36. The computer readable medium of claim 35, wherein the uplink interference information includes beacon ratio information.
 37. The computer readable medium of claim 33, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of available transmission power information; and wherein said available transmission power information includes information indicating the amount of transmission power available for transmission of information including at least said frames.
 38. The computer readable medium of claim 33, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of a maximum number of frames of information that can be communicated in a segment.
 39. The computer readable medium of claim 38, wherein the maximum number of frames of information that can be communicated in a segment is a function of the highest rate option that the wireless terminal can support.
 40. The computer readable medium of claim 34 further embodying machine executable instructions for quantizing differently depending on an expected rate of transmission as part of said step of mapping.
 41. An apparatus operable in a communication system, the apparatus comprising: a processor configured to: generate at least one reporting control factor as a function of at least one of channel quality information, available transmission power information, device capability information and quality of service information; and map a number of frames to be communicated to a report value as a function of said generated at least one reporting control factor.
 42. The apparatus of claim 41, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information; and wherein said channel quality information includes at least one of uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information.
 43. The apparatus of claim 41, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information; and wherein said channel quality information includes uplink interference information.
 44. A method of operating a base station, the method comprising: receiving a transmission backlog report from a wireless terminal, said transmission backlog report communicating a report value; and determining a reporting control factor corresponding to said received report, said reporting control factor being a function of at least one of channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information.
 45. The method of claim 44, wherein said report value is a multi-bit report value.
 46. The method of claim 44, further comprising: interpreting said received report value as a function of said determined reporting control factor.
 47. The method of claim 46, wherein interpreting said received report value as a function of said determined reporting control factor includes determining backlog information relating to frames to be transmitted by said wireless terminal.
 48. The method of claim 47, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information; and wherein said channel quality information includes at least one of uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information.
 49. The method of claim 48, wherein said channel quality information includes uplink interference information, and wherein said uplink interference information includes beacon ratio report information, the method further comprising: prior to said step of determining the reporting control factor, receiving a beacon ratio report from said wireless terminal.
 50. The method of claim 47, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of wireless terminal transmission power information, the method further comprising: prior to said step of determining the reporting control factor, receiving a transmission power information report from said wireless.
 51. The method of claim 47, wherein said step of determining a reporting control factor includes estimating the maximum number of frames of information that the wireless terminal will be able to communicate in a segment if said segment is allocated to the wireless terminal.
 52. The method of claim 48, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of another factor, the method further comprising: prior to receiving said transmission backlog report broadcast a value representing said another factor.
 53. The method of claim 47, further comprising: receiving a second transmission backlog report from said wireless terminal, said second transmission backlog report communicating a second report value said second transmission backlog report being of the same type as the transmission backlog report; determining a reporting control factor corresponding to said second received report, said reporting control factor corresponding to said second received report being a function of at least one of channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information; and interpreting said received second report value as a function of said determined second reporting control factor.
 54. The method of claim 53, wherein said report value and said second report value are the same, wherein said corresponding control factor values are different, and wherein interpreting said received second report value determines different backlog information relating to frames to be transmitted by said wireless terminal than interpreting said received report value.
 55. The method of claim 47, wherein determining a reporting control factor includes determining a reporting control factor type from among a plurality of reporting control factor types as a function of a bit pattern of at least a portion of the received report value.
 56. The method of claim 47, further comprising: receiving an additional transmission backlog report from a wireless terminal, said additional transmission backlog report communicating another report value; and determining to interpret said received another report value without using a reporting control factor, said decision to interpret without using a reporting control factor being performed as a function of a bit pattern of at least a portion of said received another report value.
 57. A base station comprising: a receiver module for receiving reports from wireless terminals said reports including transmission backlog reports wherein a transmission backlog report communicates a report value; and a reporting control factor determination module for determining a value of a reporting control factor, said reporting control factor being a function of at least one of channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information.
 58. The base station of claim 57, wherein said report value is a multi-bit report value.
 59. The base station of claim 57, further comprising: an report interpretation module for interpreting said received report value as a function of a determined reporting control factor.
 60. The base station of claim 59, wherein said report interpretation module determines backlog information relating to frames to be communicated by a wireless terminal which transmitted the received backlog report.
 61. The base station of claim 60, wherein said reporting control factor determination module determines said reporting control factor as a function of channel quality information; and wherein said channel quality information includes at least one of uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information.
 62. The base station of claim 61, wherein said channel quality information includes uplink interference information, wherein said uplink interference information includes beacon ratio report information, and wherein said receiver also receives beacon ratio reports, the base station further comprising: a beacon ratio report module for recovering a beacon ratio report value communicated from a wireless terminal.
 63. The base station of claim 60, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of wireless terminal transmission power information and wherein said receiver also receives wireless terminal transmission power reports, the base station further comprising: a wireless terminal transmission power report recovery module for determining wireless terminal transmission power availability information.
 64. The base station of claim 60, wherein at least some reporting control factors are determined as a function of a current maximum wireless terminal rate option, the base station further comprising: a wireless terminal maximum rate determination module for determining the maximum rate option that said wireless terminal is to use for an uplink traffic channel segment.
 65. The base station of claim 60, wherein at least some reporting control factors are determined as a function of an adjustment parameter which is broadcast over a broadcast communications channel, the base station further comprising: a transmitter for transmitting said adjustment parameter.
 66. A base station comprising: means for receiving reports from wireless terminals said reports including transmission backlog reports wherein a transmission backlog report communicates a report value; and determination means for determining a value of a reporting control factor, said reporting control factor being a function of at least one of channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information.
 67. The base station of claim 66, wherein said report value is a multi-bit report value.
 68. The base station of claim 66, further comprising: means for interpreting said received report value as a function of a determined reporting control factor.
 69. The base station of claim 68, wherein said means for interpreting said received report value determines backlog information relating to frames to be communicated by a wireless terminal which transmitted the received backlog report.
 70. The base station of claim 69, wherein said determination means determines said reporting control factor as a function of channel quality information; and wherein said channel quality information includes at least one of uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information.
 71. The base station of claim 70, wherein said channel quality information includes uplink interference information, wherein said uplink interference information includes beacon ratio report information, and wherein said receiver also receives beacon ratio reports, the base station further comprising: a beacon ratio report means for recovering a beacon ratio report value communicated from a wireless terminal.
 72. The base station of claim 69, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of wireless terminal transmission power information and wherein said receiver also receives wireless terminal transmission power reports, the base station further comprising: transmission power information recovery means for determining wireless terminal transmission power availability information from a received wireless terminal transmission power report.
 73. The base station of claim 69, wherein at least some reporting control factors are determined as a function of a current maximum wireless terminal rate option, the wireless terminal further comprising: wireless terminal transmission rate determination means for determining the maximum rate option that said wireless terminal is to use for an uplink traffic channel segment.
 74. The base station of claim 69, wherein at least some reporting control factors are determined as a function of an adjustment parameter which is broadcast over a broadcast communications channel, the base station further comprising: means for transmitting for transmitting said adjustment parameter.
 75. A computer readable medium embodying machine executable instructions for controlling a base station to implement a method, the method comprising: receiving a transmission backlog report from a wireless terminal, said transmission backlog report communicating a report value; and determining a reporting control factor corresponding to said received report, said reporting control factor being a function of at least one of channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information.
 76. The computer readable medium of claim 75, wherein said report value is a multi-bit report value.
 77. The computer readable medium of claim 75, further embodying machine executable instructions for: interpreting said received report value as a function of said determined reporting control factor.
 78. The computer readable medium of claim 77 further embodying machine executable instructions for: determining backlog information relating to frames to be transmitted by said wireless terminal as part of said step of interpreting said received report value as a function of said determined reporting control factor includes.
 79. The computer readable medium of claim 78, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of channel quality information; and wherein said channel quality information includes at least one of uplink interference information, downlink interference information, uplink signal to noise information, downlink signal to noise information, uplink signal to interference information, and downlink signal to interference information.
 80. The method of claim 79, wherein said channel quality information includes uplink interference information, and wherein said uplink interference information includes beacon ratio report information, the method further comprising: prior to said step of determining the reporting control factor, receiving a beacon ratio report from said wireless terminal.
 81. The computer readable medium of claim 78, wherein said reporting control factor is a function of wireless terminal transmission power information, the computer readable medium further embodying machine executable instructions for: receiving a transmission power information report from said wireless prior to said step of determining the reporting control factor.
 82. An apparatus operable in a communication system, the apparatus comprising: a processor configured to:: receive a transmission backlog report from a wireless terminal, said transmission backlog report communicating a report value; and determine a reporting control factor corresponding to said received report, said reporting control factor being a function of at least one of channel quality information, wireless terminal available transmission power information, wireless terminal device capability information and quality of service information.
 83. The apparatus of claim 82, wherein said report value is a multi-bit report value.
 84. The apparatus of claim 82, wherein the processor is configured to: interpret said received report value as a function of said determined reporting control factor. 